This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
n
cIL
"1
• i
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
2.19 ,<y -;.-''./V-; ;. ' .-.
'■ r v 7 . ." l ••" •'■I'vj-.v. A I.
•i.<-.. --'•
27ie
ASHTADHYAYIu
#
PAN INI.
.'- ...» ip*' — r; ■ -* \ ■ -
PARTS V-VIIL- 1-
S. C. VASU.
*
v •■*• -.
,•'.'- '■}":;■ "" Price R8. 3.'
1
' Digitized by VjQOQ IC
■" « ' ■ " > ■ 1 ■■ » m 1 !■ ■ in
Digitized by
Google
OPINIONS OP DISTINGUISHED PEOFESSOES OP SANSEBIT
EkJ L J'/$7Hfcr»»
If arttarfc Culbg*
ffitbfttnj
THE BEQUEST OF
PROFESSOR OP SANSKRIT
lSSo-I9a6
• f Oxford, gth February, 189*.
will be a very useful work. What
years ago when I puzzled ray head
aries. * * * I hope you may
t in Kathiawar, 20th February, 1892.
•eady been out before the Public
o pains to make the translation as
len completed will no doubt claim a
>pean scholars on Sanskrit Grammar,
of the book are excellent
*burg> (Germany.), 23rd A pril, 1893.
•e gratifying to me, no doubt, than to
nini's Asht&dhyayi, the standard work
do my best to make this valuable
immortal literature of ancient India
vo Haven, U. S. A., rjfh June, 1893.
ery well planned and executed, doing
s also, in my opinion, very valuable
ropean student of the native grammar
? It ought to have a good sale in
Opinion of Professor V. Fausbbl, Copenhagen, 15th June, 1893.
* * * It appears to me to be a splendid production of Indian industry
and scholarship, and I value it particularly on account of the extracts from the
Kasika.
Opinion of Professor Dr. R. Pischel, Halle (Saale), 27/h May, 189*3.
• • * I have gone through it and find it an extremely valuable and useful
book, all the more so, as there are very few Sanskrit scholars in Europe who
understand Pacini. ••*...
Opinion of Pandit Lalchandraji Vidyabhaskar, Af.R.AS* {London),
Guru to //. //. the Maharaja of Jodhpur*
Digitized by
Google
li5
Opinions [continued.)
?S3lTfara?Ha<*uH *4>I^I *EPg? JC^JT^Nt HTJ , ff^ 5TT5r9^f II < I 1 J
OPINIONS OP THE PEESS. >
The Indian Union, (Allahabad), 26th Novcmbtr % 1891. j
. • * * The original Text and Commentaries, carefully edited with English j
notes and explanations, bespeak of much diligence, care and ability ; and those
of the English-reading public who have a taste for Sanskrit cannot be too
thankful to Babu Sris Chandra for offering them so easy an access to the
intricate regions reigned over by that Master Grammarian. * * * We recom-
mend this book to all English-knowing lovers of the Sanskrit Language.
The Tr ibune,( Lahore), gJh December, 1891.
* * * The translator has spared no pains in preparing a translation ,
which may place Panini's celebrated work within the comprehension of people !
not deeply read in Sanskrit The paper, printing and the general get-up of
the book before us are admirable, and considering the size of the book (it is
estimated to extend to 2000 pages) the price appears to be extremely moderate.
The Amrita Bazar Patrika, (Calcutta), iS/h December, 1891.
* * * Judging from the first part before us, we must say that Babu
Sris Chandra has succeeded well in the difficult - work of translation, which
seems to us to be at once lucid, full and exact It is no exaggeration to say
that Babu Sris Chandra's translation, when completed, will claim a prominent *
place among similar works by European Sanskrit Scholars.
The Hope, (Calcutta), loth December, 1891, '
•• • * The get-up of the publication is of a superior order, and the
contents display considerable painstaking on the part of the translator.
The Arya Patrika, (Lahore) V 22nd December, 1891.
* * * The talented Babu has rendered a great service to the cause ;
of Sanskrit literature by producing the sort of translation he is engaged upon.
• • • His effort is most laudable and deserves every encouragement*
Karnatak Patra, (DharwarJ, Jth February, 1892.
* * * Mr. Vasu gives ample proof of his competency to undertake \>
the work which is not an easy task even to learned Sanskntists.
The Punjab Times, (Rawalpindi), 17th February, 1891! • j y
* * * Babu Sris Chandra is well-known for his scholarly attainments.
He has done the translation in a lucid and clear English. We can strongly
Digitized by G0O^le ._\
* 4
Opinions (continued)
recommend it to those who Wish to study Sanskrit Grammar through the
medium of English. • , •
; The Mandalay Herald, 3%$t December, 1891.
• • • Students and readers of classic language of India are much
indebted to the learned Pandit for his translation of this scientific work on the
grammar and philology of the Sanskrit language.
The AryaDarpatt) (Shahjahanpur), February, 189$. * f
• • • Such a work has been a desideratum. It is well got up> and f j
praiseworthy. We wish it every success. ;
The Allahabad Review, January, 189*. , JJ
• • * The translator has done his work conscientiously and faithfully*
The translation of such a work into English, therefore, cannot but be a great
boon to all students of the science of language and of Sanskrit literature in ]
special. The translator deserves the help of the Government and the Chiefs
of India.
The Maharatta (Poona), 4th July, 1895.
* • .• If we may judge from the first part which lies before us, it will
prove a very valuable help to the student of P&nini. * • So far as it goes
it is creditably performed, and therefore deserves patronage from all students
of Sanskrit and the Education Department
The Arya Siddhanta (Allahabad), 15M November, 1891.
u *nPii4\*T wi*^^i ejsgivquft vt oij^sft ^i^n^ *
tot tof* ifrinr m+ *ft*nr?ff *% <ntfte? fif^tf wr^r OTrfcfciTCtnif
n? 5FWfp^Hrr^^g^rf%^rf€rfe^$f* 3qp*r * «^raroir 3 titer >fr fr?«r
ii^&4fc«igF^«i^3n^^^*if5r*qrfM^ *n# irarrr »rare
^^r^W 1 **& ^ wfc *rcrw j^srenr *kt •i^9r wrroir ^ vjsnr *tar srHnrr w ^«nr^
tnirt* M^r wrtT S 5* 9fr ^53 5iHr $ 1 <rf^ w ^rr^r * *£* ^c, ^jr? to £* *i*#*
3TOTO *rr wyny i f**$1f 4k to wrrr ^t *rf ^rPS^r *r qfarrer J tfr to* *fr
\
Digitized by
Google
i/
>
T
| BOOK II.
4 > 1-
U
THE
* _ '
ASHTADHYAYI OF PANINL
• •
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
BY
6Ri&A CHANDRA VASU, B. A.,
Munsiff, Ghazipur.
51 II * ha b a b:
Published by Satyajnan Chaterji, ^
*/ M* Panini Office % '/
1894. I
•1/
.digitized by.
-Googk ."^ /
/'
Xrju tith?:: 1 *
,■ i ; .. :i v ii. ••
•,, : ;t_. ■ - •
o
\
r
HARVARD
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
Digitized by
Google
vl
TO THE
gmrttt £ft Pro Up, gt, <$. «.,
CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES,
THIS WORK
IS,
WITH HIS LORDSHIPS PERMISSION,
AND IN RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIPS
SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF
JUSTICE AND OF HIGH EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES,
9efticste»
BY HIS LORDSHIPS HUMBLE SERVANT
^ THE TRANSLATOR
\ '
3
_ Digitized
itized by GOOgle. ', 1
1
f
i
t
*-
i ; ;
!
\ l
)
I
I
i:
t !
< ,. ;. v i. ;. ».
y . i ; .. i v • '.
v .i i . c i J
Digitized by
Google
PREFACE.
QUNCE the advent of the British rule and the peace and prosperity that have
O followed in its train, and especially since the foundation of the Arya
Saraaj and the Theosophical Society, India has witnessed a glorious revival of her
ancient literature, in which is embodied some of the highest systems of philosophy
and religion of the world. Our schools and colleges are annually turning out
hundreds, nay thousands of scholars, who have entered upon the study of
Sanskrit literature, and have thus learnt to appreciate the beauties of that classic
language. Many Europeans too are taking pains to have some knowledge of
the immortal literature embodied in this ancient language. Very few of them,
however, have the opportunity of studying the language with that deep insight
and fulness of comprehension with which it was and is mastered by the Pandits
of the old school. To understand properly Sanskrit language, and especially
that portion of it in which are locked up the highest aspirations of the ancient
Aryan hearts, viz., the Vedas, the Brahmanas, the Upanishads, &c, it is absolute*
ly necessary to have a complete knowledge of the Grammar elaborated by
Panini.
Further, as a master-piece of close reasoning and artistic arrangement,
it ought to be an object of study to every one who wants to cultivate his intel-
lectual powers. In fact, what the Geometry of Euclid has done towards the
logical development of the western intellect, the Ashtadhyayl of Panini has
done for that of the Sanskrit scholars. No one who has studied this book can
refrain from admiring it It has evoked admiration even from the Sanskrit
savants of the West Professor Max Mailer thus gives his opinion about the
merits of this excellent Sanskrit Grammar : — " The Grammatical system ela-
borated by native Grammarians, is in itself most perfect, and those who have
tested Panini's work will readily admit, that there is no Grammar in any
language, that could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his eight books of
Grammatical rules."
Unfortunately, however, for our college and school students, and also
for that vast majority of English-educated gentlemen, whose number is daily on
the increase, and who depend for their knowledge of what is contained in Sans-
krit books, on English translations of Sanskrit authors, no translation of this
important work exists in English. To supply this want, we have undertaken
to translate Pimm's aphorisms, as explained in the well-known commentary,
called the Kasika. Though it is not a close translation of the whole of the Kasika,
it may be regarded as a free rendering of the most important portions of that
book. We have closely followed this commentary, explaining it where neces-
sary, and in short, making the work a help to the student, desirous of studying
the Kasika in the original.
/-
i 1 =
! /
I*
DiaiiizfidhAjQQgle ; '_ .
71
( U )
The "work when completed would, it is estimated, cover nearly two
thousand pages. It would not therefore be possible to complete it and publish
it as a completed work within a short time. We have on that account thought
it expedient to publish the work in parts, that it might be of great advantage to
our readers and a matter of great convenience to the publisher. The Ashtd-
dhydyt, as indicated by its name, is* divided into ashta Adhydyas, i. *., eight Books.
Each of these Books again is divided into four pddas or chapters. It has thus
been found expedient to publish the work in 32 parts which are available to our
subscribers only, and, when four parts are out, to have them bound in one
volume available to the non-subscribing public as well as to our subscribers.
The rates of its subscription for the complete work published in eight
Books or 32 chapters are as follow : —
{Indian) Rs. 20-0-0 in advance, including postage.
{Foreign) £. 2-0-0 n „ n
Price per set of 4 parts bound in one volume, i. e n one Book or Adhydya,
including postage— Rs. 3 (Indian) ; 6s. (Foreign).
Any encourager of Sanskrit learning subscribing for ten or more copies
of this work will be thankfully registered as our Patron and his name will be
made immortal with that of the book by giving it a prominent place in the
front of the book when it is completed. .
Our hearty thanks are due to the Honourable E. White, c. s., Director
of Public Instruction, N.-W. P. and Oudh, for his kindly subscribing for 10
copies of our work, and to all those gentlemen who have hitherto subscribed
for any number of copies or in any way encouraged us in our undertaking.
Panini Office. )
i THE PUBLISHER.
Allahabad. )
\
Digitized by VjOOQlC
BOOK SECOND.
Chapter First.
1. A rale which relates to complete woi^s
(and not to the roots aud affixes out of which the words
are constructed) is to be understood to apply only to
those words the senses of which ore connected.
i. This is a paribhAshA or interpreting aphorism. Whereever ia
this Grammar a ??f%fvr is found, that must be understood to apply to fprf
j , words. A rule relating to *j or complete words is called qflftfo The
word ftftr is formed by adding ft to the root VT^;that which is ordained
(f%>fr*fr) is called ftfir. What are those rules which are ordained with regard
to complete words ? They are as follows. — (i) Rules relating to QTOT or com*
pounding of words; (2) Rules relating to fcfftr or the application of
declensional and conjugational affixes ; (3) and the rule by which one word
is considered as if it had become a constituent member of another word
The word BH& means capable ; that is ta say, that which m capable
of expressing the sense of a sentence on analysis, is called era*? ; or the word A
OT<S may mean that which depends upon words as connected in sense;
that is to say, a rule relating to words whose senses are connected
together.
Thus it will be taught in sfltra 24 * a word ending with the second
case-affix is optionally compounded with the words fine , *pfft? &c. and forms
tatpurusha compound ; 9 as, q& fi|?f: - OTiM*: ' who has had recourse to
pain/ But when these words are not fprf or connected in sense there can be
no compounding ; as, q^ir ?Tf n *?*#. ftrtf fa«^fWT $G^Wt € see O Devadatta,
the pain, Vishnumitra has taken recourse to his teacher's house/ Here the
words qre and fctf though read in juxtaposition are not compounded, a*
. they are not H*vi.
i
1 - '
Digitized hy
Go.Qgk.___
214 Samartha words. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. § i.
Similarly, it will be taught in sutra 30 • a word ending with the 3rd
case-affix is optionally compounded* v vvith what denotes that the quality
of which is instrumentally caused ;by the thing signified by what ends with
the 3rd case-affix and with the word *vi ' wealth f as, jfajSTO! + ^C *■
3ll*WH9 u 'fi 'a piece cut by nippers. 9 Here also when the words are not con-
nected in sense there is no composition ; as, *gR«qfi!i sfrgCTQT , wit )??*f
OT#Y 'thou shalt do it with the nippers, Devadatta is cut by the stones. 9
Similarly, sutra 36 declares, ' a word ending with the 4th case-affix,
is compounded optionally with what denotes that which is for the purpose
of what ends with the 4th case-affix, and so too with the words Hi $
Wftf&c'
Thus ^IPT + qy* «- ^JJfTF ' wood for a stake. 9 But when these words
are not connected in sense, there is no composition; as, ipsg tfvrnr, fnr
5*fTO*T *ft ' go thou for the stake, the wood is in Devadatta* s house. 9
Similarly, sutra 37 declares ' a word ending with the 5th case-affix
may be compounded with the word *nr; as, ^3fcfrf)raf «- ^f*rt 'fear by
reason of a wolf. 9 But when these words are not connected in sense, there
is no composition ; as, it«3 *i itf q^tfr, *vi t**TOw **H*Mf^ ' come thou to me
from the wolves, there is fear to Devadatta from Yajfiadatta.
Similarly, sutra II. 2. 8 declares ' a word ending with the 6th case-
affix is optionally compounded with what ends with a case-affix ; 9 as, n^n
J?Pfr * ilfl^frM : ' the king's man. 9 But when the words are not ^Rtf ,
there is no composition : as HT^tf TCP, JCTfr ^Tf^WT ' the wife of the king, the
man of Devadatta. 9
Similarly, sutra 40 declares. ' A word ending with the 7th case-affix
is optionally compounded with the word jjfto 'skilled; 9 as, TOf* jfHr: —
^T^rdW: ' skilled in dice. 9 But when the words are not connected in sense,
there is no composition ; as, *rTfr*?TOlj, njft**: fiprfir *HT*n? 4 thou art skilled in J
dice, the gambler drinks in the tavern/
Why have we used the word qf ' a complete word 9 in the sutra ? So
that this sprf tfbrrer may not apply to v*f%flr '• *• rules relating to letters.
Thus rules of Bfaz 'conjunction of letters' are *rff%fir and notqtfqfc; and
therefore the condition of being connected in sense, does not apply here.
Two words however disconnected in sense, must be glued together by the
rules of sandhi, if those rules are applicable. Thus sutra VI. 1. 77 declares:
\ instead of a letter denoted by the pratyAhdra f^ there is one denoted by
\ the pratyAhdra ^tsj , in each instance, where one denoted by the pratyAhAra
*T* immediately follows ; 9 as, %fr + m^jFf «■ ^RJPf. . This substitution
of 7 for f will take place, whether the words are in construction or not, as
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
/
\
r
Bk. II. Ch. I. $ 2. ] " * Parancavat words. 215
f%^5 (u^nr ** OT^T f let the curd remain, eat thou with the vegetable cuny. 9
So also fits«j 3}*rtt«53t f[K 5l¥*f\ ' let the girl be, take the umbrella from
Devadatta. 9 Here the augment ?j^ (?r subsequently changed into ^) comes
between H\H\(\ and ww, though the two words are not connected in
sense (VI. i. 76).
g«rnifhi?| irci^tt^qft n ^ u *r^ift n g^ f wrfNit,
^PT: II 4J4«WJW&4d <?T*f: W^lT^pTf *ttPl , CT? , ^PCW?rt 3i3*3 II
2. A word ending in sup or a case affix, when
followed by a word in the vocative case, is regarded as
if it was the aftga or component part of such subsequent
vocative word, when a rule relating to accent is to be
applied.
In other words, the word ending in a case-affix enters, as if, into the
body of the vocative (Amantrita) word; as it will be taught in sutra VI. 1. 198
which declares ' a word ending in a vocative case-affix, gets the uditta
accent on the beginning /.*., first syllable/ Now, this rule will apply even
when a word ending with a case-affix precedes such word in the vocative
case. Thus the word <nft ' O two lords P has uditta on the first syllable. Now,
when this word is preceded by another inflected noun as 5p|S* ' of prosperity/
the accent will fall on ^r, the two words being considered as a single word ;
as :— qj fiJHr 3v/OftgT ff^ 'iFfr nrosihi yppT ^R^f^ll Rig. I. 3- *•
1 Asvins, riding on quick horses, lords of prosperity, and bestowers
of plenty of food, eat the sacrificial offerings to your satisfaction. 9 So also
in the following : — qp? 1 ^f€\' O thou wandering with a bowl. 44 21 HI ^pr
' O thou cutting with an axe.' snfroi KH& ' O thou king of Madras. 9 qnpfr'tnOPg
Ifil^ ' O thou king of Kashmir. 9
Why do we say c a word ending with a case-affix? If the preceding
word ends with any other affix than a case-affix, this rule will not apply.
As qfcq* <ffePTP7 ' O thou who art pained, I am pained because of this
thy pain. 9
Here <ffcpf 'being a ftarei (a verb) 9 is not considered as an aflga of
the vocative word/
Why do we say f when followed by a word in the vocative case?
This rule will not apply when the subsequent word is not a vocative. As
*f? *!!*£: ' Gdrga is at home/
/,
3igitiz£cf"5y
-Geegte--
\
tlB
Samasa Designation. * [ Bk. II. Ch.I. § 3.
Why do we say ' of the subsequent V It will not be a part of. the
vocative word which precedes. As $^5 Igntmz^'O Devadatta wandering
with a bowl' Mere «*%? has not become part of Devadatta, but of the
subsequent word ijs^ .*
Why do we say 'an afiga or component part? Both must be con-
sidered as one word for the application of the rule of accent, so that the
•first syllable of each word separately may not get the uditta.
Why do we say *as if or q^/ It is not altogether the body of the
subsequent word ; rules depending upon its own separate independent
existence also take effect.
Thus rule VIII. t. 55 declares 4 a word ending in the vocative case is
not anud&tta when it follows the word *jpj there intervening a word between
itself and^jr^jas, W{ *°3hi**|J Here kundena is considered a separate
word for the purposes of Rule VIII. 1. 55 and is said to intervene between
^jjlH and the vocative word %IZ\ .
Why do we say ' for the purposes of the application of rule of
accent? 9 For the purposes of the application of any other rule, it will not
be the aflga of the subsequent word ; as, ^ ftN^ ' O thou sprinkling in the
tvelL' ^h 5HP^ . Here had ^ and ^ been the aAgas of the subsequent
words for all purposes, their 9 and h would have been changed into * and
Uj respectively by Rules. VII. 4. 2 &c.
Vart : — When a word ending in a case-affix becomes, as if, the com-
ponent part of the subsequent word, it becomes so even when there are
several words in apposition with it which intervene between it and the
vocative word ; because that, of itself, does not constitute want of immediate-
ness. Thus ffft^iiT hjb^jt *SX**K\ ' O thou sewing with a sharp needle' fft^r
TOpfT f^ •
Far/:— Prohibition must be stated of indeclinable words. As
^^offalf f O thou reading loudly.' *fr$T>fNFC .
3. From this point up to the aphorism kada-
rakarmadh&raye (IL % 38), all the terms that we shall
say describe will get the designation of sani&sa or
compound. •
\
Digitized by
■Google
Bk. I. Ch. I.. $ 4. ] Samasa Designation. 117
Thus it will be stated. 'The indeclinable word ^^1 when not mean*
ing like unto. 9 Here the word €PfT9 must be read into the sutra to complete
the sense. In fact this chapter and the second chapter treat of compounds
and therefore the word compound must be read in all those aphorisms.
The word prik is employed for the same purpose as it was used in
I. 4. 56 that is to give the designation of wnm to various technical terms
like »|fc4|4Njl<l &c which otherwise would not have got th e name
of ^rorcr*
*f gui nan n^ife n *f f s*n ( s^toto ) 11
jf%: 11 *W?t sr?ftr gWr n * nrrerfafri %;*?i*^ *ffcr wjjtf ipncftai*
4. The words * saha sup&* meaning c with a
word ending in a case-affix/ are to be understood in each
pf the succeeding aphorisms.
In this aphorism the word *rq[ is understood from sutra .2, so that
it consists of three words vis., §^ f QW, fjir. All these three words jointly £n4
severally, one at a time or two at a time, should be understood as governing
the.succeeding aphorisms, as the contingency of each sutra may require.
This aphorism will constantly be applied .in translating the sAtras.tha^
follow.
Why have we used the word «f ? Well, without it the sfltra would
have stood thus: fg^ CTff ' a noun may be compounded with another noun *
But this overlooks the case of a compounding with a verb. The word Qf
is therefore used so that we may be able to break this composite sutra into
two separate and simple sutras, namely:—
(0- f » 3^i *Pl**rifr wH* 'a case-inflected word may be com-
pounded with a word with which it is connected in sense. 9 Here the word Qf
with the help of the three words H^ taken from sutra 2, Qirc*p) from sfitra 3,
\ 1 and ^nwfsr from sutra 1, forms one complete aphorism, and applies to com-
) I pounds like My^TO* m^nfo . The accent will depend upon these
\ being considered as samisa.
. ' (2). wn ^f ^ ^rcs^ a sup-inflected word is compounded with
another sup-inflected word. The compound which does not fall within any
of the various sorts of compounds to be treated of hereafter, will fall under
this general head of compounds; as, 3*H<|Hi<f *rirt W ^jnWtnft TO- This
also is for the sake of accents.
Digitized by"0 OOQlC
218. AVYAYIBHAVA DESIGNATION. [ BK. II. Clf. I. $5, &
efsnft HT99 it h * *H[ifH > wwHMWt » * ■
5- From this forward whatever we shall
describe will get the name of AvyayibMva sam&sa or
adverbial compound.
This is also an adhikAra aphorism like the last As far as sfitnt 21 9
the compounds treated of, will get the designation of AvyayibbAva. The
word W^rffan like the word qi frw^pftn is a self-descriptive term, and not an
arbitrary term like ft , fir "&c. When that which was not an indeclinable
becomes an indeclinable, it is called tmpftqr? or ' becoming an indeclinable/
In the AvyayfbhAva compound the sense of the first of its elements is the
main one or the independent one on which the other depends.
If fJHlill *Plfa II
6. An indeclinable (avaya) employed with
the sense of an inflective-affix (vibhakti) or of near
to, or prosperity, or adversity, or absence of the thing,
or departure, or not now, or the production of some
sound, or after, or according to, or order of arrangement,
or simultaneousness, or likeness, or possession, or to-
tality, or termination, is invariably compounded with a
word ending in a case-affix which is connected with it
in sense, and the compound so formed is called Avya-
yibMva.
The words g^ and *m are understood in this sfitra. The
word tot should be read as connected with every one of the above
phrases*
Digitized by
Google
Bk. IL Ch. I. § 7 ]
AVYAYIBHAVA DESIGNATION.
219
\
i. f%*ft*TOr;— As nfcfer *WT *tf& f a story relating to women.*
Wft^tftft ' relating to a girl/
2. q*ftqq*w ; — As OT^f^ * near to the jar/ 4<mf%Hi ' near to the genu 9
3. 0^TTT; — As eirf • well or prosperous with the Madras';
tpPTO ' well with the Magadh.'
4. «^f«^nr;— As jfarft* ' ill with the Gavadikas;' fivt f ill with the
Yavanas.*
5. spfmre* ;— As ft#ftre<t • free from flies f fkA^i • free from
mosquitoes. 9
6. wnrr^Pr;— As faffing 'on the departure of the cold weather';
7. HS^rHrr^r;— As «rf?lrctapi^ € past (not now) the time of wearing
quilts. 9
8. jregryfayw ;— »As xRf fft ' the exclamation Hari' (thus $c^j$
?ft tfc ?red/in the house of the Vaishnava there is the cry of Hari Hari').
9. TOIS^r ; — As HJ^ltf qifm^ € the infantry after the chariots. 9
10. ^qnff ^t; — The meaning of the word ipir is four-fold, viz. corres-
pondence, severality or succession, the not passing beyond something, and
likeness; thus (1) Hjvf^HJ^'in a corresponding manner. 9 (2) smnh( 'according
to each or several object or signification. 9 (3)' tptnrf^E ' according to one's
ability/
11. * nyg $<WH ; — As *xrofcr ift^jwj H**3: 'let yoiir honors enter
in the order of seniority. 9
12. ifbmflre? ; — As qm& Wtf f simultaneously with the wheel. 9
13. *Ufm*M ;— As OTfe f like a friend/
1 4. ^Tfiw^r ; — As toct? ' as warriors ought. 9
15. HHi^nr^f; — As «<l<Ut 'even to the grass 9 i>. the whole,
not leaving even a scrap.
16. H?<irc? ; — As otRt as far as the chapter of fire (i>. the whole
Veda). •
^fxT: II 4>3<d<14*44l | i41li\d *3itf ^TT flf ^rt*«i<)» j***CNtto ww&t *ffall
7. The indeclinable word yath*L when it does
not signify 'likeness 1 is invariably compounded with a
Digitized by
Google
fl9 * AVYAYIBHiVA Designation. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. § 8, gu
word ending iii a case-affix which is in construction
with it and the compound is called an Avyayibh&va
Sam&sa.
Thus TOf^Pt WimMWm** invite every old Brabmana. So also
Why do wc say € when not signifying likeness?* . For there is no
composition when likeness is indicated. As ipntafTOTO! TOT^ As is Deva-
datta so is Yajfiadatta.
This samasa could have been included in the last sfttra clause 10,
but making a separate sfttra shows that the word qqnfa^HT ther^ must be
limited by the present sfttra, to first three meanings of the word iptf given
there and not to its fourth meaning, via. there is no compounding when it
means likeness.
qm^mvfi n c it x^tfn n *n*^ f w»rc5* , (qegin
<jai: ii *r*$**<r**wnnfrc* *#?p# *nr *f arc*?* Hs^frronr
8. The indeclinable word y&vat when it sig-
nifies limitation, is invariably compounded with a word
ending in a case-affix which is iu construction with it,
and the compound so formed is called Avyayibh&va.
The word MT*imj means accurate ascertainment, restriction or
limitation. As, *mi? *tf *McmJMfH»*l4*4 ' invite so many Brahmanas only and
not more as there are pots ': *>., if there are five pots then invite five Brah-
mans ;if six pots, then invite six Brahmans.
Why do we say* when meaning limitation? Observe *TPTf*f HTf^
%*&{ 'I ate so long as it was given to me/ i>. I donot know for certainty how
much I have eaten.
U<ih(Jh hu* iii ii % ii n^xfk ii 3* , hrri , *mn-«n( f
( ofrstroHTo^no^f ) »
^i: ii inrrtf ^mt«ff iOrt ^sw 5^*^ *wwft *w(Niwi wrtfr *wflr ii
9. A word ending in a case-affix is com-
pounded with the indeclinable word prati, when mean-
ing c a little * and the compound is called Avyayibh&va.
^Digitized by .
Google
Bk. II.'Ch.'L § 10, ii.] Optional Compounds. Sil
The word imrr means f a drop/ - a little/ *a wee bit/ as, spraniflr
4 a little of vegetable/ ^jPlft ' a little of soup/
Why do we say ' when meaning a little* ? Observe wrf ijflr fttfcRt
ff im ' it lightens in the direction of the tree/ Here it is not compounded.
Though the word sup was, by anuvritti from sfitra 2, understood in
this sfitra, its repetition in the text is for the purpose of indicating that the
anuvritti of the word 3R*ra which began with sfitra 6 does not extend further
into the subsequent sfilras.
The word irRfaT being exhibited in the 3rd case-affix is not an upasar-
jana (I. 2. 43) and therefore, it comes as the last member of the com-
pound (II. 2. 30).
^^OT^ten: tif^IT n %0 II t^pSr II 9TO-SJ6T5T-TOi: f
*nrf?rii
10. The words aksha, c a die for playing
• with, 1 sal&k& * an ivory piece used iti gambling, 1 and sai\-
k£hy& ' numerals ' are compounded with the word pari,
and the compound formed is called AvyayibMva.
This OTRT is restricted to terms applicable to gambling. Thus there
is a game called panchikiL which is played with five dice or five ivory pieces.
When all these five pieces fall with faces turned upward, or all with faces
turned down, then the thrower wins the game. But when the fall is other-
wise, he loses. Thus ^TWfR' ' an unlucky throw of dice.' ^rer rw i ft , ' an un-
lucky throw of ivory pieces '; so also jJ«ti<jft ' an unlucky throw by one over*
fCTft", Rrrft" and lastly ^rwfft*.' This is the maximum. But when five are of
one form, then of course, he wins.
fSmtm n 9? n nyfh n fwnn «
^ ~ 11. The word vibhasM or oj)tion governs all suc-
ceeding s&tras.
This is an adhik&ra sfitra. All the rules of compounding given here-
after, are optional. The same sense can be expressed by the uncompounded
words as by them when compounded. But not so are the compounds which
have been treated of, before. Compounds like girsf , *prr^u# f WTrfc &c.
mentioned above arc invariable compounds ( fir?*f WW ) f the sense conveyed
by the compound term, not being capable of analysis, by taking the senses of
gitized by VjOOQIC __;
Digitized
221 Optional Avyayibhava Compounds. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. §12-14.
the separate members of the compounds, or at least not capable of expressing
any sense without inserting extraneous words on analysis.
*TO*: f tn^Ti (**3W «f* fko) ■
*ot* fnralr *fft 11
12. The words apa, pari, bahih and indeclin-
ables ending in auchu may ojitionally be compounded
with a word ending in the fifth case-affix/ and the com-
pound so formed will be Avyaylbh&va.
As *nf3r<T*T ^*ffr ?f: or mfttffrqt ^sn?*: 'it rained away from
Trigarta. So also, qftftjra^ or <rfi:3rir3far; ' round about Trigarta/^r^qfin(or
^rftirfwi ' outside the village' itf^ iJPFJ or mil llPm^ ' east of the village/
Words formed from the verb *t^ 'to go/ are wt\ 'north* irfW
'east/ &c.
From this sfttra we learn by inference (jnipak) that the word qfe
also governs the ablative case (see II. 3. 29).
^jwitltarrv HHt^t >nrft 11
13. The word aii when signifying limit ex-
clusive or limit inclusive, may optionally be compounded
with a word ending in the fifth case-affix and the com-
pound so formed is called Avyayibh&va.
As, *rrvi?fopt or wrarfoyrr^ ^*H ?*: ' it rained up to PAtaliputra/
MPg*tf or W^RW^lf im. <ttfa&t: 'the fame of P&nini extends even to
the boys/
^ftc: 11 frwf Pro? tfcrftnir sp^ta *rsrfip?*fl'#*Trerfa5^ ^h$hi*h ftror
^«r^J mi«i41whw *i*n€lr wRf 11
14. The words abhi and prati when implying
direction (towards), are optionally compounded with
a word ending iu a case-affix denoting the limit, or the
Digitized
by Goog le^— --
./
XUc.H. Ch. L § 15, 16. ] Optional AvyayibhavaCompounds. 223
goal which regulates or marks the direction ; and th.e
resulting compound is Avyayibh&va.
The word lakshana means a sign goal. See also L 4. 84 and 90
for a further explanation of this word. As M**jfrr or ttffepift vmfi <Flffef
1 the moths fall in the direction of fire. 9 So also rorfir or hPh *fit , the
sense being, that making the fire their aims ( ffl^* ) they fall towards it.
Why do we say 'when meaning lakshana '? Observe ytf irfJr iRf: f he
turned back and went towards Srughna *>., having turned back he went only
towards the direction of Srughna but not to that place itself*
Why do we say the word* abhi and prati ? Observe Jfarfirefr T iw:
'he went in the direction of the fire. f '
Why do we say 'when meaning direction towards? Observe
M^TJT *TPT or st?q|-l<U4: * the recently marked cows/
Qqrcftwitru
- . 15. Tlie word anil € near to' is optionally
compounded with that word, nearness to which is indi-;
catedby the particle, and the resulting compound is
AvyayibMva.
As, qpKra*Tgi%*fcT: ' the thunder bolt fell near the forest'
Why do we say ^5 ? Observe q* *nm 'near the forest/
. Why do we say ' when compounded with the word, nearness to
which is indicated '? Observe T^PH* f%«?Pl# f**J1 ' >* lightens towards
the tree/
Though this compounding was valid even by sfltra 6, because near*
ness fs mentioned there also ; it is repeated here in order to show that
an Avyayibhava compound mentioned here is an optional compound after
all, and not an invariable compound like others*
*re* *iram: 11 1* 11 vyfe it wn , * , smnf: , (w~
wofcwo ssiSpt erg:) n
fRf: n 3^*6*rcPTfr^ 3* Frerwjfcr *? finwr ***** *ra*ftor*v ^mrtt
*Wftrn . >
Digitized by
Guagfe-
J
J; 221 Irregular Formations. [ Bk. II. Ch. L $ 16-18;
x - -*
f 16. The word aim i alongside of is option-
f ally compounded with the word indicative of that
whose length the particle expresses, and the compound
1 so formed is called Avyayibh&va.
As, tpnfrf. *jnm!Frf> ' the city of Benares extends alongside the river
Ganges' tppprt irvCT ' Mathura, alongside of the Yamuna, the length oC
Mathura being measured by that of the Yamuna. 9
Why do we say ' length'? Observe <KiH«f fir*ft«H& f%*£l •
j
) fsra*^ xw^fn * n<9« ti^fft i! fete** wnxtfk i
HPrturRr H*fer 11
17. And the words tishfchadgu, 'at the time
\\ when the cows stand to be milked,' &c. are Avya3 r |bh&va
compounds. j •
The words ftte^g &c. are all irregularly formed AvyayfbhAva "com-
pounds. Most of these words are epithets of various times. The force of
: ^ in the sfttra is restrictive, ^that is to say these words always form the Avya-
^ . Aytbhiva compound and nothing else.* They are as follow : —
) J ^ l ^t^ ft***5» ***J, Brm^rnr^, *s£*nrn, fs3yr^ f hjrt**, wwnr-
i*f~ 5^*1' **& * wrfrft, &***, fawi, J*** 1 *, firwr^, »rr^nnj, w-
^TTOVl , « U ^<*H^ , f^fffcirf?l?r? V. 4. 127. e. g. ^TCRtft II
18. The words p&ra f across/ and madbya
( i middle' may optionally be compounded with a word
: ending in the sixth case-affix, when they take the forms
1 j; pare and madhye, and the compound so. formed is
Avyayibh&va. - ,
. . Ordinarily these words would have formed Possessive Tatpumsha
compounds. The present sfttra ordains Avyaytbh&va instead. The force of
kn
,».— ,«-o* * » * * m. 0>m
.,!■., ,qnl hy
Googk,
Bk.H/Ch. I. § 19, 26."] Irregular Formations. ***
It in the text is that the Genitive Tatpurusha compounding also takes place
in the alternative. As, qitif*T^or ifirrnr^ 'across the Ganges/ *v}*fa\ or
«t*FWJ 'middle of the Ganges. 9
Of course according to the option allowed by sfttra II. 1. 11., this com-
pounding need not take place at all, the same sense being expressed by a
phrase ; as qit tftrTOT: or if«t *f<rr*T: ♦
*W WW H 91 H H^lOl X\ ^qrT, twfa, (^eftosTOW*) ft
^wreflr *r«rfll 11
19. A numeral may be compounded witlr
a word denoting 'one belonging to a family* and the
resulting compound is Avyaylbhdva.
The word *fjj means uninterrupted descent of persons from a com-
moo source whether through birth or knowledge. A succession of teachers
and pupils, of ancestors and descendants &c., would constitute a to ' family/
One born in or belonging to such a qfor is called a <ft*r or descendant.
As, fi^ft MU<*i< isreg ' of the Vyikarana which has two sages as its
principal expounders viz., Pinini and Patanjali. So, firjfa mi** 1 *** 'having
three representatives vis. PAnini, Patanjali and Sakatiyana or K&tyAyana.*
When- we desire to express their equality as regards knowledge,
then both the words are put in the same case : as fajfr or fiprfir niMiiUft^ .
So also when the relationship is by birth: as, gqtfferft *!H&1*U^
Twenty-one Dhiradwijas. These a subsequent compounds are like Dvigu.
*!%: II *#*"&: U$: ** staff BH&&, ^JsitfhOTV *m$l H*fa II
20. A numeral (saAkhyd) may be comixmnd-
ed with names of c rivers ' and the resulting compound is
Avyay ibhftva denoting an aggregate.
According to Patanjali this refers to their Aggregate ( OTTfTT ) ; as
HTPTJFH ' at the meeting of the seven Ganges/ fifayc 'at the meeting of
the two Yamun4s, <f^Tf ' where the five rivers meet/. mHiUm^ 'where
seven Godavaris 9 meet. See II. 4. i y 17.
tjpfr: II I^Pfc Hf «M*-i*i^Hmi3T **?«ltf ^TPHf fv& STOP* WrffapP*
HHPSt Hlft II
Digitized by GOOQ IC
228 Tat-purusha. 1 Bk. If. Ch. I. § it ±23.
t-
•\
21. A word ending in a case-affix is com-
pounded with words denoting the names of rivers, when. *
the compound word denotes a thing other than that;
expressed by the t3rms of the compound, and is an
appellative ; the compound so formed being an Avya-
ytbh&va.
The anuvritti of the word saAkhyi does not extend to this sfitra.
Though this rule is given in the subdivision relating to optional compounds,
it is, however, a Nitya-samAsa rule: for no Name (tfjflT) can ever be expressed *l
by a sentence, and that being so, these compounds can never be analysed.
As, 3?3*PTjF 'the country called Unmatta Gange*/ So also tHlQd'Wt t
fFQFtnH ; nfain\ II. 4. 18.
Why do we say ' when it denotes a thing other than that expressed
by the component parts of the compound'? Observe fraut<* the - river
Krishnavepa.' .
.Why do we say • when it expresses an Appellative ? Observe tfhftttft
^j: ' the country where the Ganges moves rapidly/
*f?3*v 11 « n xt^rf^r 11 ci?3^r: n : *
22. From this aphorism as far as aphorism
II. 2. 23, the word Tat-purusha is the governing word,
and is understood in all the following sCitras.
«
From this sfitra as far as the sfitra II. 2. 23 relating to Bahuvrfhi
compounds, the word Tat-purusha should be read into each sfitra. This big
term is of older coinage than that of PAnini, being, in fact, made by
older grammarians. In the Tat-purusha compound, the sense of the last of its T
elements is the main one, and governs the preceding one. The Karma*
dh&raya (Appositional Determinative Compound) and Dwigu (Numeral Deter-
minative Compound) are also subdivisions of this class of compounds. The
test of this chapter and 22 sfitras of the second, deal with this.
23. And the kind of componnd called D\^igu
(Xnmeral Determinative Compound) is also called Tat*
purusha. ..'..>*
Jiyiiizedbi/UOOg^CT "
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 23-35. ] Tat-porusha. 127
The ofijcct of making Dwigu a subdivision of Tat-punisba Compound
is that the crirei?? affixes and rules given in V. 4. 68-160 should apply to
Dwigu also. Otherwise we could well have dispensed with this sutra ; as
sutra 52 of this chapter already defines Dwigu. Thus ^hfnw V. 4. 91 fern.
<f*crjft (IV. I. 15, 21), 'an aggregate of 5 princes' Wf: 'V. 4. 89, <rorj^'an
aggregate of 5 cows.' f^PI*^ ' an aggregate of ten cows/ V. 4. 92.
*jf5r. 11 fWhn*tf *£Ftf famftfo frf «roiS, **jstv mtit «ftr it
*r?$*p{ 11 fM«rfftyrSwi»mO^ yuUwiv^ 11
24. A word ending with the second case-affix
is compounded with the words &rita c who has had recourse
to/ atita l gone by ' patita c who has fallen upon, 1 gata
* who has gone to ' atyasta c who has passed,* jn&pta c who
has pbtaiue 1,' and &panna { who has reached/ and the
resulting compound is called Tat-purusha.
As 9*** + fir<f: = ^rsjfiin: ' who has had recourse to trouble.' HC'frPw ,
So also : — gCT*<uTnfttf: ' who has passed over the dreary forest.' fTCSffttr:
1 fallen into hell/ fTPTiW ' gone to village.' fH?*mw**f: 'passed the waves/
*TCWT: 'who has reached pleasure.' f[3tf?*T: 'who has obtained happiness.'
Varti — The words *pfr , trrft &c. should also be included. As fTPPPftf
^PH: 11 wnflftwg*** *sx*sm *r? ***** «hts*v nnntt ttRt it
25. The indeclinable word swayam 'oneself,
is compounded with a word ending in the affix kta, and
the resulting compound is called Tat-purusha.
The anuvritti of the word fttfttn; from the last aphorism into this,
cannot take place ; though, however, it is understood in the next sutra. The
word *m\ being an Indeclinable, cannot take any case-affix. As *^t vfhft" ?{fc
1 feet washed by himself ' srt f%gfaWTW( •
In this compounding, the two words do not appear to have undergone
any change after their composition. They are the same as they were
[be ore the composition. But by calling their juxtaposition, ' a compound/
Digitized by
Google-
J
*28 Tat-purusha. ■"•• [ Bk. II. "Ch I. § 26, ^7.
two indirect advantages are gained. Namely these two words are
regarded as one word, and their accent is also similarly regulated. See
Rule VI. I. 233.
o
The words ending in lcta which is a Nish|h4* affix, are past parti-
ciples.
(fV^hniT) n
26. The word khatw& in the accusative case
is compounded with a word ending in the affix kta, when
censure is implied, and the compound so formed is Tat-
purusha.
The word sf* means 'censure/ 'blame* and this sense can be con*
noted only by the compound word as a whole and not by any of its consti-
tuent elements. This compound is also, therefore, a Nitya Compound, though
it occurs in the subdivision relating to Optional Compounds : — because it is
impossible to analyse such a compound and express, by means of ^TftMtmce,
the sense conveyed by the function of the compound word.
As <jj£l*;<f: or <4£|g<K (literally lying on a bed) ; silly, stupid, going
wrong or astray*
There is no compounding when ' censure is not meant. As *grjnTTCtt
€ lying on a bed/
Why this word should have this opprobrious meaning, will be under-
stood from the.,. consideration of the following facts: — a person under the
Aryan social polity, could only then enter the married state or the life of a
house-holder, as it was called, when he had completed his Brahmach&rya i.e.
the prescribed period of bachelor studentship. All Brahmacharis were
bound to sleep on ground and not on ?g;f or cots, so long as they were
Brahmach&ris. A person who without completing his studies, and without
obtaining the permission of his teacher, entered into matrimony, was origi-
nally called, in reproach, 43314*4: 'who had ascended the couch in an improper
way. 9 Then the term was extended to all persons guilty of vile action.
**'
Digitized by
Google
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 27.29. ] Accusative Tat-purusha. ' 22$
* ■■ ■ ■ ■■ I ' * ■ - ■ ■ I. ■ ■■ ■■■!■■ .1 . I ,
'27. The indeclinable word s&mi meaning
> { half ' is compounded with a word ending in the affix
kta, and the resulting compound is Tat-purusha.
The word mPt being an avyaya, and not denoting any substance,
cannot take the affixes of the second or any case. Therefore the anuvptti
of the. word ft<ftar would be inapposite in this aphorism. -
As srf*fT<PJ * half-done/ *tr3rft«F( ' half-drunk' *rrftTOP(' half-eaten.' : :
The object attained by thissam&sa is the same as in II. 1. 25, namely
making them one word and taking pne accent
tost: n V> n ^if^ b ^T^t:, (9cf9*<rw%cfta*n*BH) n
28. The words denoting time, being in ths
accusative case, are optionally compounded with a word
ending in the affix kta, and the resulting compound is
Tat-purusha.
r This rule applies when duration of time is not connoted by the
compound, which is provided for, in the next aphorism. The word *tF£tf;
does not mean here, as it would otherwise mean by Sutra I. 1. 68, the word*
form 3CT5T but special words denoting qjKrf •
As »?ra3Tft3Wprr: 'the new moon/ (literally, the moon that has begun
to measure the month). Similarly ^CTSTT^TT: , *Tprefarn*lf: applied to six
Muhurtas (of 48 minutes each) which are called ^r and M^C which some-
times occur in day time (in the summer month) and sometimes in the night
(in the winter).
Htj^w ^rerelr H*fir 11
29. Wbids denoting time being in the accu-
sative case, are oxDtionally compounded with a word
cilding in a case-affix, when used in the sense of com-
Tplete connection throughout with the time (i.e., dura-
tion of time) and the resulting compound is called Tat-
l purusha. * . ■ • .
3
_^gitoib^GDjagk«^ — *
JM Instrumental Tat-pupusha [ Bk* II. Ch. I. § 59-3 t;
— — — _^ , >.
Tlie word 9ft<? is understood in this aphorism; but not so the phrase
* ending with the affix *|?/
The word iqtqTd^iqlw means 'uninterrupted connection/ For accent
of these words see VI. 2. 2.
As 3g*iq«t ' a momentary pleasure/ ^ Irnrar^TOft , f riiiJfttftw .
gator vevarifa sp'TOta n ^0 u v^ifk n s^hn , srjt
30. A word ending with the 3rd case-affix
is optionally compounded with what denotes quality,
the quality being that which is instrumentally caused
by the thing signified by what ends with the third case-
affix and with the word artha 'wealth,' and the com-
pound so formed is called Tat-purusha.
The words *J«r, *J?T are understood here: and the whole of this sutra
is an epithet of those words. A noun in the instrumental case is compound- .
cd with a word expressing quality, and with the word *5ju: provided that the *'
word expressing quality is itself the result produced by the sense of the
word in the instrumental case. As 3Z3t?ran3T: *fcfc*fM°*: c cut by nipper*
f^R*^Pf: 'made blind of one eye by a hog' \ji«-q i J : 'wealth acquired
by grain/ For accent of these words see VI. 2. 2.
Why do we say * when caused by the word in the instrumental case?
Observe vfq°it 3JPI: 'blind of one eye/ Here M^Tf in the 3rd case is not the
instrumental cause that produced blindness and hence no compounding.
Why do we say ' a word expressing quality 7 Observe :— nfflJ^Trw
'sowing with the cows/ Here though 'sowing' is instrumentally caused by the
cows, yet it does not qualify cows but the sower, and hence no compounding. <•
Guna-vachanas are those words which, not bejng words formed by
primary or secondary affixes, or other words entitled to the name of safikhyA,
or sarvan&ma, or jiti, or compound words, are words denoting qualities and
capable of being used as adjectives qualifying substantives.
^fa: 11 «il sr^j sw s^rnJ isst* f%yi fa* jr^uj ^: ft? stfhir** wi&A
wjctv OTiHir «refir 11
I
(
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
\^JH V | gg ap^>*M.-:y;j' ^>;~
Bk. I. Ch. I. § 31,32] Instrumental Tat-purusha. 831
31. A word ending in the third case-affix is
compounded with the words pfirv T a 'prior,' sadpi^a ( like/
sama c similar/ uuartka c words having the sense of less/ '
kalaha 'quarrel/ nipuna 'proficient/ mi&ra 'mixed/ and
slakshna ' polished sleek' and the resulting compound is
called Tat-purusha.
From this sutra, we learn incidentally that the words ^i &c, govern
the instrumental case.
As, *ircto 'Jr. = Tra^jf 'prior by a month/ sfaTOr<£t: ' prior by a year/
HftQZlJ: 'like the mother/ fittZQ: 'like the father/ vrnZOT: 4 similar to the
mother/ fira^W ' similar to the father/ *Ti"*frr*[, *rrqf%3irt ' less by a m4shi/
HftRf5Tf: 'a fight with the swords/ qT3?*tf: 'bandying words/ VT^f^Tf:
1 proficient in speech/ W^PT f%*°r: ' proficient in the observances of sacred
duties/ fh*tf%4(: — ^f^T 'mixed with sesamum or juggery ' SH^UVH^J*
' polished in behaviour/
Vart : — The word sprc should be enumerated in the list, as irrenrt:
Mater than a month/
^3**1 3kit «f|5H n ^ n tj^ft it ^g-**** ; ^n
32. A word ending with the third case-affix,
when it denotes the agent or the instrument (II. 3. 18)
is compounded diversely with what ends with a kpit
affix; and the compound so formed is called Tat-
purusha.
The word 335! shows that there is a general relaxation of all the rules
and conditions. As a??fTfS*T: «= *rf|*tf: 'killed by the snake 9 srcrftfY*:
' ci/ided by the nails/ TOjf^r: ' cut by the axe/
Why do we say 'when denoting the agent or the instrument'?
Observe PrflTfHSf^: 'dwelt with alms.' Here the force of the 3rd case is that
mentioned in sutra II. 3. 21 and not that of II. 3. 18/
Why do we say 'diversely? Observe SPteJ frfcnii/ cutting with the
sickle/ TCSptf&snrP^ 'cutting with the axe/ Here there is no compounding.
But there is compounding where otherwise there ought not to be, because of
the word ¥j5f:— as <rrf*nM*: and ir^ ^ftw .
fSJ • Instrumental Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. $ 33, 34.
*i**w£ fiwrc, ?rj^w *wwir *Fri% 11
vrf^f*^ 11 frerep? ygMfrf r* ^nS**^ 11
33. A word ending with the third case-affix
ivlien it denotes the agent or th 3 instrument, is com- A n
pounded optionally with a word ending in a kpitya affix,
"when an exaggerated statement (whether of praise or of
censure) is implied, and the compound is Tat-purusha.
As 5>T3PhrR$' c a shallow river ' (so shallow that a crow may dip his
beak, into it and touch the bottom and drink). %$$&: ^T. 'a shallow well 9
(so that a dog can lick water from the brink of it). *T*re»3rrf? ar°nf% f thin
.grass ' (so fragile that it can be cut by vapour) *&&&&$& •TtTT •
This sutra is in a way a prolongation of the last ~
Varti — The phrase 'words ending in akritya affix* must not be taken
universally, only the kritya affixes tj^ and 1&F{ are meant in the above sfitrasC
The following are the kritya affixes: — fl€*r, itffcr , 1<J, ^FT^, WJ» (see
sutra III. 1. 95-132)- Therefore there is no compounding when the word ends
in w&f as in 3tI&.?lt|W|| .....
wftr. 11 «r^rnf% ttdtai^Hmiftni s^Rfr *s q'wfl f%wrr, tregtro
viralr*nfirir
34. A word ending with the third case-affix
and denoting a condiment, is optionally compounded
with a word ending in a case-affix, signifying food, and
ihc resulting compound is called Tat-purusha.
That which is to be prepared is called *&?, and that which prepares
is *<i!H ; as $wffar: - $*^f viMRl-rh W$H: 'rice prepared or made rclishable \
with curd/ So also <ftft?r: . The words 'food* and 'condiment 9 as repre<* I
sented in the above compounds, are connected in sense by a verb
understood.
12
Digitized by
Google
Bk; It Ch. L § 35, 36. ] Dative Tat-purusha: 133 j
\
35- A word, ending with the 3rd case-affix
and denoting a relish giving or refining ingredient, is'
compounded with a word meaning, victuals, and the j
compound is Tat-purusha. ;
Anything eatable, whether hard or soft, is called H%* ; its refinement
is called ftMNffTCf . As tfTORT: ' barley prepared with juggery;' ^n^St % }
'flattened parched rice prepared with juggery. 9
The connection here also between the two words is established by a
verb understood.
36. A word ending with the 4th case-affix 1^
compounded with what denotes that which is for the
purpose of what ends with the 4th case-affix and so too
.with the words artha c on account ot,' hali c a sacrifice/
hita c salutary,' sukha c pleasure * and rakshita c kept,'
and the compound is called Tat-purusha. m . ? •
The words *rr . «qr are understood in this sutra : and the whole sAtra
qualifies these words.
>
By the expression n?& ' for the purpose thereof/ the special relation
of a material and its modification alone is by Patanjali here held to be
intended. As *£TTO *IT: — gffify : 'wood for stake 9 (that is wood which by modi-
fication will be changed into a stake). « u 4t<(|< u 4 ' gold for ear-ring/ But not
so here. €»hhI4 ^qrrff ' pot for cooking.' *TCfFfnf)Rrg35Y^ 'the wood mortar for
threshing. From this sfitra we may also infer that the Dative case conveys
also the sense of ' for the purpose thereof. 9 The word «f?qfc$ is taken as one
word by some, meaning ' a thing serviceable thereto/ See VI« 2. 44. For
accent see VI. 2. 45.
_ _ „ , _ Di^itized^y^VjVJVJ
J
*3» Ablative TAfPURUStfi. [-fiiL II.; Ch. I. $ 36-38,
Vari : — With the word ipfr the compound so formed is a Nitya com-
pound (an invariable compound) and agrees in gender with the word which
it qualifies ; as, frfOTnl^TW: 'milk for the sake of B rah mans ;' and tfn^OTitf *TCP£
•"gruel for the Brahmanas.' So also qgtr*fc: ' a sacrifice for Kuvera ' Hf Kl in!f£
9 a sacrifice for the great Raja/ *tt?W*i c what is good for cows/ »?£?!ftf 'what
is good for horses ' ntf ^ ' what is pleasant for cows ' ifttflni ' what is kept for
cows/ (as grass). . .
tror*ft vfon 11 3* n ippfk h m*ni 9 win 9 (*oxofeo&
jRe 11 w**t %*** h*q$* ***&* «? *top* firaro hijctv
*rf$*pj 11 *w tf * tf» *&3r ftftr totoi; 11
37. A word ending with the 5th case-affix is
optionally compounded with the word bhaya i fear/ and
tlie compound is Tat-purusha.
The phrase gv wn is understood here, and the sfitra qualifies it.
1 ' - As^£t?frF* - %*&$ 'fear from wolves ' *frr.4?f « fear from thieves*
f^npt 'fear from robbers/
Vart : — So also with the words *fhr, dhUr and *jfc as ^3Pfttt: , «T*41f?*: ,
This sfitra is an expansion of sfitra 32 and an exposition of the word
*|7* there. So that we may have the following compounds also: mnfipfa:
9 gone out of the village.' «qvpc irgtsj: .
jfta 11 •?** Hrhr j*ir qf?nr stto* f*tfc *r? <ff^**af **?*% «ct*to
OTrift H*fir 11 • *j*<ncr \fa iAHWWwfamwmw* 11
381 A word ending with the 5th case^affix is
compounded with ths words apeta 'gone away,' apodlha
c carried away,' mukta c freed, 1 patita c fallen,' apatrasta,
'afraid of,' when the event takes place in a gradual
manner, and the compound is called Tatpurusha.
As, *Hgrt<r: • gone away from pleasure ' qrererftT. 'carried away by *£
imagination * ^WJ^T: ' freed from the wheel/ srfaft*!: ' fallen from heaven/''
<Hji4MW 'afraid of the waves/ This is an expansion of II. 1. 3*.
■ O t y i tiiiiU by Vjg ' QOQiC '
.Bk II. Ch. I. § 38-40. ] .Ablative Tat-purcsha. " t&*
By using the word %l*!Q: 4 in a gradual degree/ is shown the limited
range of this kind of compounds. Not every ablative word can be so co.m->
pounded. Hence there is no compounding at all in the following cases : —
*IW$nj<Cilnf:, ' fallen from the mansion. *fr*PnTPR<f: ' afraid of eating. 9 Fo^
here the fall &c. is violent and sudden, and not gradual and slight.
ww?^* fi?j^rw OTrft *rcf% 11
39. Words with the sense of stoka c a little,?
antika c near,' dfrra ' far,' and also ths word kfichchhiu
€ pe nance/ ending in the 5th case-affix are compounded
with what ends in kta, and the compound is Tat-pnrusha.
As Sfftau*J g*ff: ' loosed from a little distance.'
So also sif^eran^nnf: f come from near 9 *pqiXTi?PFir: ' come from near f
^II4HM: ' come from far/' RiJ$ȣl4/JM: 'come from a distance. 9 fk*3&ip*r. saved
with difficulty/ 9>«3r«^3r?: 'obtained with difficulty. 9
By rule VI. 3. 2 the case-affix is not elided, in compounds of
this kind. "
Vart : — The words jpf c * hundred* and sja c a thousand' are similarly
compounded with the word qc« As, 3X*fT?7?"<;<tl x 4J4i: 'beyond a hundred/
So also <rct{&?3r: 'beyond a thousand.' In these examples the word jjn and
9fif being exhibited in the ist case and thus being upasarjana ought to have
stood as the first member of the compound (II. 2. 30) ; But these compounds
are supposed to fall under the class of n*f$?4 &c, (II. 2. 31) and hence the
upasarjana stands as the second member of the compound. Irregularly is
also the augment fr ( 5^ ) interposed between these two_words.
qptft *fo$: 11 so n n^ifa 11 *Fift , nU&z (now*
fawago )»
• • , 40. A word ending with the 7th case-affix is
compounded with the words samida c skilled' &c v ai^
the compound is Tat-piirasha,
Digitized by
Guogfe*
J
tsi Locative Tat-purusha. "[ Bk. II. Ch. L §40.43.
: Z , — _ — ■
The won) 4hl& in the sAtra being in the plural number indicates a
class of words beginning with saunda.
As, nfi; &**: - WTOh**: f skilled in dice * W^: 'cunning in dice*
W l flfcW ' a gamester in dice.'
The following is the list of JpNrtft words: — I &**, 2 *# , 3 f%n* , 4
*IT* , 5 1*N 1 6 «<fcf , 7 war^ when meaning place, 8 wfa , 9 <f 1 (or *lfalj) ,
iotftrv/'u *5*p*, 12 'ww , 13^3*1 i4**r* f 15^^. and i6srffc.
<$*: II Rr«-^«- TO **£ f**£: «f *ffP*frf ****?*, IRJTO V Witt Wflr II
41. A word ending with the 7th case-affix is
fcoinpounded with the words siddha c perfected,' 6ushka
c dried,' pakva c cooked f and bandha c hound,' and the
[resulting compound is Tat-purusha.
U^ * ^ As, qr fai l Vlfag: 'perfect inSAnkAsya.' STrpTFufacj: 'perfect in KAmpi*
: ^ lya/ *nfmp^: ' dried in the sun/ Qranp*: 'dried in the shade. 9 twftTO:
.' 'cooked in pot/ sjwfr qfR 'cooked in an earthen jar/ 'TO^ar: ' bound on the
wheel. For their accent see VI. 2. 32.
These are also further illustrations of the word mi? in sfttra 32.
go^nft ) it
^fa: II UH^tMlftHI «f MHM**I «**tf *PTOi*, *W**P¥ ^RTUt Hfft, ^
?F^WF# II
42. A word ending with the 7th case-affix is
compounded with the word dhv^fiksha, c a crow,' (and
with synonyms of crow) when contempt is implied ;
and the resulting compound is Tat-purusha.
As, tfhh^Hr: c a crow at the sacred bathing place ' i.e. t a very greedy
person ; as a crow in a bathing place does not remain long, any where, so
a person who goes to his teacher's house and does not tarry there long, is
called a ffhl^nr. or a ffh?*ror: . -
When it has not this meaning, there is no'compounding: as, tftifofcl'*
f&gfir ' There is a crow in the sacred bathing place.' ^
?jfc£*i ti «^ 11 tr^if5f 11 tsA: f vg% 9 ( ww
*jf*T. II fffil I^OT^: *&f ^S**I*rf fTTOl#, S*J**PI WfpSt HfffC ^1 *
is
•'""_ Dltpj
srcrGeegle-
Bk. II; Ch. I. § 43-45.] Locative Tat-purusha. 23T
43. A word ending with the 7 th case-affix is
compounded with words ending with a kritya-affix (a.
fnt. pass. Participle) and the resulting compound is Tat-
purusha, when c deht ' is implied.
This compound is confined to the words formed by the kritya affix ^(
and not to every kritya-formed word.
As, srro$?i • a debt repayable within a month.* So QTCTC*^ ' payable
within a year.' *33??p^ 'repayable within three days.*
By using the word ^pi we indicate by implication any appointed time
ia general, and not merely a time for the payment of a debt Therefore we
get compounds in the following cases also: — <Tf?£f ^ ott 'the Sama that
should be sung in the morning. 9 JTRT^iJ^Jr&Jfr^: ' the chapter that should be
studied in the morning. 9
Why do we say ' debt'? Observe mH %ir fkqct 'the alms that should Toe
given each month/
3^t ** ) »
44 A word ending with the 7th case-affix is
invariably compounded with a word ending in a. case-
affix, when the compound thus formed is used as an appel-
lative, and is call.d Tat-purusha sam&sa.
A sanjfia is expressed by the complete word, hence it is an invari-
able (nitya) compound ; for we cannot express an appellative by a sentence.
As, WTnfr Ph*(: ' wild sesamum' yielding no oil ; anything which does
not answer to one's expectation. So also *|T*iNrer: , *$ fti^H: ' anything
found unexpectedly.' So also ^fa^T^r: , qgifini^l: .
The case-affix is not elided , in this case, in accordance to sfttra VI.
3. 9. (The 7th case-affix is not elided after words ending in consonants
or in short s? when the compound denotes appellative.)
wfSrii
«'■•-'■«■■■
Cooglc
(
238 Locative Tat-pubusha. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. § 45-47
45. The names of divisions of day or night
ending with a 7th case-affix are compounded with words
ending with the affix kta; and the resulting compound
is Tat-purusha.
As, ^f^fnp( 'done in the morning. • ^rnrgyPT ' done in the after-
noon/ <r#rPT^nj ' done in the first part of the night.' HHUIM-fld ' done in the
last part of the night. 9
Why do we say 'members or divisions of day and night?' Observe
^RfRr yw 1 ^' eaten in the day ' Kt*?t <pPf ' occurring in the night/
This being a continuation of sfitra II. 1. 32, we have diversely
3* n )$ n ^ifSr r tnr , ( *ofraio*po*f ) *
*fa: 11 irWfcnt fr-wwf *w*hr ^rt *wwft, h^*mv *w4t *nrRl 11
J 46. The word tatra ' there,' which is a word
A ending with the 7th case-affix, (V. 3. 10) is compounded
I with a word ending in kta, and the resulting compound
is Tat-purusha.
Thus mnpRi^' eaten there/ inrfftf 'done there.* iprffcf ' drunk there.'
By making this a compound, the same purpose is served as in sfitra II. I. 25
namely, these two words form one word and get one accent
tft h «» 11 n^ftr 11 *ro , ( *ofiw?wF**f *toi ) »
^ftr: 11 *ft ij***n* ****&* wretar *r? w&vft, inj^rv frcrcft *wfa 11
47. A word ending with a 7th case-affix is
compounded with a word ending with the affix kta,
when ' censure ' is implied, and the compound is Tat-
purusha.
As, *m trfcgg5lft*nt * *£** 4 they are as if an ichneumon standing on
hot ground (metaphorically said of the inconstancy of man) ^TWJ II
So also *^ f%tfH^' dried in water,' (figuratively used for any thing
unheard of or impossible.)
So also n?r$ «rftr*!^ ( lit. } 'making water in a stream/ (fig.) ' doing a
useless action.' q**f?r J*l* ' offered oblation in ashes, 4 (fig.) 'a fruitless action. 9
The 7th case-affix is not elided in the case of this sfitra also. See
sfitra VI. 3. 14.
4
N ■ »— ■' . n M L^^.CZ r%r%cf\ <>'
t \
•f /
I
i
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 48-49. ] Irregular Tat-purusha. 239
< f (*o*o*fo ) n
48. The words like p&tre-samrnlta 'a dish-com-
panion* (a parasite\ &c, are Tat-jmnisha compounds, when
contempt is implied.
All these are irregular compounds. Some of the words contained
in this list are compounds formed with the past-participle ( ^V ); they could
have been formed by previous aphorism also. Their inclusion in this list is
for the purpose that their first member should have udatta on the beginning;
because all the words belonging to this class, are a subdivision of a larger
class called ' $TU<t urf| Class ' treated of in sfitra VI. 2. 81.
The following is the list of the words: — I qi^faft^r: , 2 qrfeffqr:**
parasite' (constant at meals or dinner time). 3 «f*9CmnR 9 4*J*1tftf%: f
5 3**^:, 6 arare&r., 7 «Tf?*i«a[<T:, 8 «TO"?£K:, 9 VWIE^*» »o ^fFHR^r^
11 «mrwRT. , ia^iirfnnr:, 13 ^raft^ro, 14 ffir<r*tocr:» 15 fr^^p 9 16^^^
17 *Wfct >8 itf*Hr, 19 ^tf%fH*,2o *t?mr*: f 21 i^fr, 22 i&vtft,
23 *Hr- > 2 4 *ft*«r , 25 «?<?*:, 26 trraftfroi: , 27 ift«?ijc:, 28 iiteftfiifl,
y 29 ifrd^Wt , 3° nf'Sqp , 31 «ft«?<rl*m: , 32 ift&jii+tt , 33 *roff%fr^nr,
34 stffa^nii
( ^ofawgos*** ) n
^f fprep^, *iw*mn fwrcfr H*f3t ir
49, A case-inflected word denoting an action
which natnrally precedes in time (p&rvak&la), arid the
words eka { one, 1 sarva * all/ jarat c old/ pnrai.ia { ancient/
I nava 'new,' and kevala 'only/ are compounded with their
I co-relative case-inflected words which are in the same case
I with them ; and the compound so formed is Tat-purusha.
I The phrase fj^ ^p?r is understood here, the whole sfitra qualifying it.
Words which separately can be applied to many distinct and differ*
4 ent objects, when they apply to one common object, are said to be in apposi-
j tion ( 9fPrrft9it*i ) or abiding in a common substratum.
I * In the present sfitra the word-form pfirva-kala is not to be taken
H
Digitized by
Google
*W " Irregular Tat-purusha [ Bk. II. Ch. !. § 49-15.
(I. I. 68) but its significates ; while of the rest 5*1 &c., the very word-form is
to be taken. A word denoting action which naturally precedes in time, is
compounded with a word denoting action which naturally succeeds it. As,
«m(£%re: * bathed and perfumed.' JRTT^frltfr^' ploughed and levelled/ fnjsro^
_^£> 'burnt and healed.* {g^TOT^ /Uav i n^ one petticoat.' H*tf5*W '<*>egging
* *j£~^* once Jn a da y- f «^TT- 'AH gods. uIuhuu: 'all men/ srrptt 'old elephant/ si*^
\ *jfe 'an old cow/- irt^Rff: 'old occupation/ jrnum* ' old rice/ jnccnrcWff ' afl
old habitation/ So *m*% ; TITTO*!* ; *fOT*P[ f only rice/
Why do we say ' when they are in the same case ?* Observe ^f^T
VtSt 'one's petticoat.*
These and the subsequent compounds are KarmadhAraya Compounds
(I. 2. 42).
f^rsf^r tow* 11 \o 11 -^fa ii f^*M t *«nn* ;
^Tifhr H^f5f 11
50. The words expressing a point of the com-
pass, or a number (saiikhyu) enter into composition with
the word correlated to them by being in the same case,
when the sense of the compound is that of an appella-
tive ; and it is a Tat-purusha.
The phrase ' being in apposition/ is understood in every one of these
sfitras up to the end of the chapter.
As q^r iipixpft 'the town of IshukAma*amt-in-the-east/ ^nr'J^OTXPfr
'the town of Ishuk4masamf-in-the-west/ q^WT: 'the five mangoes' HtPW 'the
seven-sages* (the constellation of the Great Bear).
Why do we say ' when the sense is that of an appellative ?' Observe
3tUI j&l: ' northern trees.* <H fffspir: ' five Brahmanas/ See IV. 2. 107.
vneft f ** ( *Oct$fiwf^rsr^N*l* ) n
«ff%: 11 *fe*m fireS ^Tit^t n qr*?: «ir*ft -qifin^ f^^eNr* OTRiftr-
51. In a case -where the sense is that of a
Taddhita-affix, or when an additional member comes
alter the compound, or when an aggregate, is to be ex-
D i git i ziod by '
Goagk —
Bk. II. Ch. I. §51-52.] Dvicu. ***
pressed, then a word signifying a point of the compass
or a number, enters into composition with a case-in-
fleeted word which is in agreement with it by being in
the same case, and the compound so formed is called
Tat-purusha*
First let us take the case where the sense is that of a Taddhita-affix.
Thus when a compound is formed out of the words <rjfcqt jrT5TT*tf *W:
.'that which is in the eastern hall' (in which analytical exposition of the
compound in question, the word Hf (IV. 2. 107) serves to represent the
force of a Taddhita-affix) the compound having reached the form ofvj$r+
OTtiT, the feminine termination of the <r^f is rejected, because Patanjali
declares that the masculine state belongs to a pronominal 'when exercising
any of the five functions belonging to a word; we have: — ^ji'+ TJ&H + *¥
(IV. 2. 107) - <ft|*n«T: (VII. 2. 117 and VI. 4. 148) 'who is in the eastern hall.'
So also when an additional member comes after the compound (uttar-
pade\ As, gf srjrretffor : or HjmilMiPi qr: ' loving the eastern or western hall*
Thise Uttarpada Compounds are invariable (Nitya) compounds, so that they
can not be resolved into their component elements.
When a *nnyi* * aggregate' is to be expressed, it is of course impossi-
ble to use a word expressing points of the compass ( R^ words ). The
following compounds are formed with numbers ( ffcnrr ), when employed
with the force of a Taddhita affix ; as, ft^nfiflr. 'relating to five barbers/
■fl^^m** : 'relating to an oblation offered in five cups' («tMi<*) (IV. 1. 88). So also jlaJL
q^irrc? (V. 4. 92) ' wjjdse wealth consists of five cows/ f^HPTW i&^Zt***** ,
The following are examples of aggregates: — &TK$t * the collection of / /^j trV ^
five fruits' (IV. 1. 21) ^Tgft 'an aggregate often bundles/ {TOtal the aggre- "
gate of the three worlds.' q^r^iffft ' an aggregate of five virgins/ this word is
neuter by II. 417. and the long $ is shortened by 1. 2. 47*
52. In a case where the sense is that of a tad-
dhita affix, or when an additional memher comes after
the compound or when an aggregate is to be expressed,
the compound, the first memher of which is numeral, is
called Dvigu or Numeral Determinative compound.
Digitized by
Google
£4t Irregular Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Ch I. $ 52-53.
First to take an example of Taddhit Artha: — as, <ft* «1T^J *Nfft: -+OTT
qm: ' an offering prepared or offered in five cups. 9 So also Wh<JM: ' prepared
in ten cups/ These are names of Purodisa offerings ; and are formed by
adding the affix H*\ in the sense of ' refining an object of food ' by sutra IV.
2. 16; then this affix is elided (q^) by IV. 1, 88.
* To take an example when an additional member comes after the com-
pound. As tf^luRu: ' loving five ships. 9 fl*(qv-<j*j/ money which has come
by two ships ' (ft+*ft+f^ V. 4. 99«fi[*r*)
Of an aggregate we have q^^fr. The feminine is formed by IV. 1. 21.
( qofeoTPS^f 0** ) i
rf&sJ^^f* — ^i^^oZ. Case-inflected words expressing vileness
a e^r^are compounded with case-inflected words, expressing
* contempt, and the resulting eom pound is Tat-purusha.
As 3w4imj<£K£ft; ' a bad or dull grammarian/ Here it might be asked
is the word tqr^Otf 'grammar* a word of contempt, or the word fr^HMUJ
'grammarian? Neither ' Grammar ' (it being a part of Vedanga,) nor the
person who studies it 1. e. 9 the grammarian, can be an object of contempt
ordinarily.
The word 'grammarian 9 is, however, the expression of contempt in an
indirect way, thus :— The person studying grammar but not studying it well,
becomes an object of contempt and such a despicable person becomes also
contaminated. The word ignft is a term of contempt per se. It literally means,
a person who on being asked a question, and not possessing ready wit and
intelligence to answer it, scratches his head and contemplates vacancy
OfctH^ifiO and tries to divert the questioner's attention by exclaiming ' how
beautifully clear is the sky/ such a person is called ^p^fe .
Such compounds are confined to cases where the reason for the use
of any particular term is to express contempt with regard to the signification
of that term. So we can not form a compound of the sentence t qHii ^ ^ ftc
'the thief grammarian;' for, contempt is not expressed with regard to the signi-
fication of the word ' grammarian.' But when the term ' grammarian ' it-
self is used in a contemptuous signification, then a compound will be formed.
This aphorism is commenced in order to introduce an exception to
sutra 57, by which an adjective stands as the first member in a compound.
By the present sutra, however, the attributive word will stand as the second
member.
Digitized by
Google
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 53-55. ] Irregular Tat-purusha. £48
Other examples of such compounds are: qifr^fci^q. * one who hankers
after performing sacrifices for persons for whom one ought not to perform
sacrifices' iftahrsff-J^*: 'an unbelieving logician/ 'an athiest.'
No compound can be formed under this aphorism, if both the words
are not used in an opprobatory signification as such. Therefore it is not
in the following case. ^fgOTfonroj ; 'the bad Br&hmana 9 &c.
( *o<wfeogdSf ) n
^f%: ii <rrr srcrai ^ g**& ^fw^nr^: *Tf *H$ttt , ^jwv wft **flr II
54. The case inflected words papa c sin,' and
anaka c insignificant,' are compounded with words
expressive of vileness, and the compound is Tat-purusha.
Both the words qrr and spraf are words of contempt («gW*) ; by the
last sutra, they would have stood as second members in the compound; the
present sutra, however, is so framed with regard to sutras I. 2. 43 and II. 2. 30,
that they will stand as first. As MUHifqq : or afl!J3ftrfTO: 'a contemptible barber*
qrr? or *rro-*h?<r«i: • a contemptible potter. 1
q q* UW lfif*l* H ?q* re fr: II HH II inpft II WlMlft, *TOini-
*W%: , ( q9cf0&9$6S0q0 ) N
*reftrii
55. Case-ipflected words denoting objects of
comparison, are compounded -with -words denoting what
is likened to them, by reason of the latter possessing
qualities in common with the former, and the compound
is Tat-purusha. ■ . , .
That by or to which a thing is compared is 'upam&na' and the
'upameya' (the thing compared) is called <nn?ir or 'common.' Thus ^RTOT
3TCJ; 'cloud-black Krishna' (Krishna black as a cloud). Here (qpr is a quality
common to Krishna and cloud: therefore 'cloud 9 which is the SWT is com-
pounded with it. So also ^yx^ft 'lily-white.' ^OT!{fr 'Swan-sounding'
**PTnr- , nfr»fl«W 'globular as Nyagrodha tree.' For accent see VI. 2. 2.
But not so in ?^f(T X*l*t ' black Devadatta' or qjw ft ^JW: 'the rice
are like fruits ' T$*ir ff HWVSt: ' clouds like mountains/
^ioiteUay.
G.ooglf
$44 Irregular Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Ch. I. § 56.
g qfa iMi m fffir: qummmft* ! n <$ n *^ift n «*faiw,
56. A caso-inflected word denoting subject of
^comparison is compounded with the words vydghra
'tigor,' &c, the latter being the standard of comparison,
and in construction with the former ; and the compouud
is Tat-purusha ; provided that any word expressing the
common characteristic fcnm<»4) as explained above, is not
employed.
This is a modification of sutra 5T, by which the objective would
have stood first; by the present, the attribute stands second. As J^frt
cm**? ■ 5****nr ' a person-tiger' (in strength) Jtqflif:
In the last sutra, the compounding was between the cttot and the
common quality. In the present, the compounding is between the 3<rf%?f and"
certain 3«JHH but never with tfPTTOT TOT. Therefore we can not form this
kind of compound from the following sentence: — J^tft ctTO T? qr: 'a man
strong as a tiger.' Similarly JSTTtP^, 3«WH* , 9?cf%5Hflrcpj , Itfii * WJ II
The words urn? &c. are Mnp!n«rJT: 1. e. 9 this is a class of compound
words, the fact of a word belonging to which, is known by its form, a posteriori
and is not discoverable by any consideration of its constituent parts a priori.
The following is the list of such wordsri-
t. «*nr - A tiger. 2. flf? - A lion. 3. *nr - A bear. 4. ^^M
- A bull. 5. *&& - Sandal. 6. ^ - A wolf. 7. *q - A bul!.
8. *n? - A boar, hog. 9. fftn^ - An elephant. 10. <!*> - A tree.
"• *&* m An elephant, 12. ** - A kind of deer. 13. ^?r - The
spotted antelope. 14. y»3<Nf - A lotus flower. 15. q^TO - A tree Butea
Frondosa. 16. fam • A rogue, cheat.
1. 3*!W^ *)
> A lotus-like face.
2. y&*sH*K\ J
3. HiiftmfrWH - Sprout-like hand, a tender hand. 4. Iffdf V£ .
Digitized by
Google
\
Bk. II. Cm. I. $ 57,58.] Irregular Tat-purusha. *li5
ikvton fvWii *$s*u \s n q^rffi u f*ita*p^ f fift-
***** , *rc3**5? vrrthr **•% 11
57. A case-inflected word denoting the quali-
fier (the Adjective), is compounded diversely with a case-
iuflected word denoting the thing thereby qualified, (the
Substantive) the latter being in agreement (same case)
with the former ; and the compound is Tat-purusha.
The 'discriminator' is called ftftfr* and the * discriminated 9 is called
ftdc* as s f l f ft M rf 'a blue lotus/ Ttftntf * a red lotus/
By «sing in the rule the expression *f$f 'diversely* it is meant
that in some cases it is imperative to make a compound (PrtgOTra) as fTOTcrf:
'a black snake/ mft*trri& 'red rice*: — and sometimes it is forbidden; as f trffr
Wl^q : ' Rama called also Jimadagnya* (as being the son of Jamadagni):
*T J*: W^M: — and in some cases it is optional, tftaPTU?* or ^taifrrel .
Why do we say ' qualifier? 1 Observe «RHJ: Sl$: 'the Takshala snake. 9
Why do we say ' qualified/ Observe 5ftQ?rcn?r*i: ' the red Takshaka/
»
^ftt: ir <jj in* to* ^kh ti^i ww *w w <It fnNfr ^fwir viRif^r-
58. The case-inflected words p&rva l prior/
apara c other/ prathama * first,' charama l last/ jaghanya
hindmost,' sam&ua 'equal/ rnadhya 'middle/ madhyama
'middle/ and vira 'hero/ aro compounded with words
ending with a case-affix and which ai\3 in agreement (same
case)', with them ; and the compound is Tat-purusha.
As <gf T$m 'ancestor/ (any one of the three, father, grandfather and
great-grandfather), wn**: 'successor/ ^<H^H 'last person/ 4flM-n;ftM : "hinder*
most person/ wjh;j*1. / equal person/ ir* or ifiiwj^r: 'middle person/ 4tt]TO
•heroic person/
5
a i qjtfrgrl ... L^QO . ^ l C
146 . Irregular Tjltporusha. . [ Bk. II. Ch. L § 59.
" ' ^ ' ■•■III I I
irPfopj 11 ^^iRv «^Jf^^ 11
59. The case-inflected words 6re\it l class '
&c., are compounded with words kfita 'made^&c., which
are in agreement (same case), with them; and the com*
pound is Tat-purusha.
Varii — The words ^fijj &c, for the purposes of this sfltra, are suppos-
ed to have the force of the affix T| (chvi). Thus «p!fcro *to*P ffflT: - , 5ftjfflin
• made into classes ' (those who were not classified before).
The class of words called fftrff are Akpti-gana and cannot be known
a priori. [This SamAsa is also an invariable SamAsa by reason of sfltra IK 2.
18, since all words that end in chvi ( Fj ) are called gati (I. 4. 61.) j
1. 'fcffij - A line, a series. 2. q*R - One or «w . 3. ^r - A
heap, collection, multitude. 4* 5<5f =* Name of Krishna or *pf . 5. rrft *■
A heap, mass, collection. 6. ftTO ■» A collection, heap. 7. f%T* «■ An
object or ftfta . 8. J%>FC« Poor, indigent or firepr, fWPT 9. *T -» Distant,
to. fpff ■ The god of rain. it. ?* ■ Divine, celestial. 12. y*f - Sha-
ved, bald. 13. *gr • Become, being. 14. wr* - Sraman or VRQJ . 15.
*?TO» Liberal minded. 16. WOTPK-A teacher. 17. «rf>rareff - Handsome.
18. w«Pl - BrAhman. 19. ^Hrr - Kshatriya. 2a ftfy? - Dis-
tinguished, distinct. 21. qj - Clever, skillful, dexterous. 22. qf»?W-
Learned, wise. 23. *jjp* - Right, proper, good. 24, «to* « Shaking,
trembling, tremulous. 25. Pito - Skillful, dexterous. 26. fsroj - Wretched,
helpless.
W$Rl*IUjtW^
1. ^m » Done, performed, made. 2. Pftf «=» Measured. 3. ifl{ •
Thought, believed, supposed. 4. *nr ■■ Produced, formed. 5. to? » Said,
spoken, uttered. 6. ij*s - Joined, united. 7. B »ff<rn f -» Known or under-
stood thoroughly. 8. *HIHM - Repeated, recited. 9. *qreqpi -
Reckoned up, counted, summed up. 10. fhftfCT — Considered, supposed,
imagined 11. ftdfcr - Served. 12. «rroiftir - Ascertained, known.
13. M^HiP-mi *- Corresponded with, answered. 14. fttt^tt - expelled,
banished. 15. CT^Rt "Assisted, benefited, served &c. 16. VfffW— Invited.
17. f? «■ Seen, looked, perceived* 18. q*fc<f «■ Counted, 19. jfaft -
Digitized by
Goog le
[Bk. II. Of. L § 60, 61. Irregular Tat-puru$ha. £47
Broke 1, torn, itnt, burst. 20. ^Tfn - Said, uttered. 21. f%MH - Well-
known, renawned. 22. TffV — Risen.
*rf#s^ 11 i>OTTfrm^rrywRRff^ n 1 ir
60. A word ending with the affix kta, and
not having the negative augment nau is compounded
with the same word ending with the affix kta but which,
is distinguished from the former, b3' having the augment
nan; and th3 compound is Tat-purusha.
Thus ^TrfRPT 'done and not done/ ijTKpra* 'eaten and not eaten/ <fclT-
qftf * drunk and not drunk/ Yfftfr-r^?? 'spoken and not spoken. 9
The intermediate augment *f or the f, as in the following two
examples, do not make the forms dissimilar. *r foMHfyfr f sfrffa, ftlCT-
f&fiO&r *3# II
Vari: — The compounds fCTTCfHT &c. should also be included.
1. ftffRfr*. 2. *j^rRpr^r. 3. <fr*r>fhr. 4. imwhk i. 5. ginnim.
6. iFCTivrf^rcrr. 7. 3414/4411. 8. ir^nrRrrar. 9. iisft^jifou.
Vart: — The compounds like 2tTl«hqifv? should also be enumerated, and
there is elision of the second member in these compounds. As JCTR5fa*t ^ift}^;
~ frramf^V 'the king beloved by the people of his era. 9 i.e. an era
making king.
i. vnraTtiqr. 2. ^rroi^f. 3. sjmm^fk.
wf^i: 11 **n Hf\ to** wi ^ifrar ***$ <^rww €f awvft, iwjctv ccirafr
„„ — „ _„ '~Dig4tis©€Uay.
■Google-. j
248 Irregular Tat-purusha '[ Bk. II. Ch. I. § 62, 63.
- . — -
61 . The words sat 'good/ mahat 'great,' parama
4 highest, 1 uttama 'best,' and utkrishta 'excellent,'
are compounded with the words denoting the 'parson
deserving of respect ; and the compound is Tat-purusha,
As QT7CT: ' a good person/ trfTTCT: 'a great man;* TOT***: 'the highest
person ;' ttojto 'the best person ;' ^f^ g ^H: ' the excellent person. 9
Why do we say 'with words denoting the person deserving of
respect?' Observe 3?$?: ifh srf TP* ' the ox was pulled out of the mud. 1
.OTWlt *CTt*l II
62. A case-inflected word denoting object
deserving of respect is compounded with the words
vrind&raka 'eminent,' miga 'serpent or elephant,' kuiijara
'elephant'; and the compound is Tat-purusha.
As iJI^Heb: ' an excellent bull or cow/ mmfr4K^» : ' an excellent
horse \ So also ifrfPT: , «Tt^*TC: &c. Why do we say • when meaning the
object deserving of respect?' Observe *}^Ntaf'l: '-the serpent Susfraa/
^IHflTTOft 11
63. The words katara 'which or who of
two ' and katama ' which or who of many', when used
in asking questions about the genus or class, are com*
pounded with other case-inflected words with which
they arc in construction, and the compound is Tat-
purusha. -
As 5nira?: and ^ HUMN : ' which of the two is katha, and which
-k&'.ipa?' 7OT3?*: and ^^T^T'HR ' which of these is ka(ha &c.'
It might be objected, 'what is the use of employing the word
an ftlfimf in the aphorism ; since the word qROT is especially employed in
asking such questions; (see V. S. 93) and the word 3*nr will get the same
signification by being read along with it?' The very use of this phrase
Digitized by
Google
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 64, 65. ] Irregular TiT-PURusHA. tto
a
in the aphorism shows that the word qnpf has other meanings besides that of
an interrogative pronoun, of determining jiti ; as qnrft TOft^fl^T : 'which of
you two, Sirs, is Devadatta/ and qstpfr ifHlt t*ff*f : ' which of you, Sirs, is :
Devadatta,' Here there is no questioning about jAti, all belonging to the
same genus, hence there is no compounding. (Accent VI. 2. 57.)
fii €^ h \% n n^ifa 11 fa* , oft 9 ( mommmfiK
wt^taf** ) N
64. The word kim 'what/ when implying
1 contempt,' is compounded with a word ending in a case-*
affix, and the compound is Tat-purusha,
As fitf <nir ^t * Cfffir ' he is a bad king who does not protect his sub-
jects.' faf TOT itif^jfH 'he is a bad friend who hates.' fW iffc *f * *ffil ' it is
a bad ox that does not carry.' '
The affix ^ (V. 4. 9 1 ) does not come after this compound as in
RSTnr: &c, by force of Rule V. 4. 70. Otherwise the form would have been J
ftftnr and not fcfcnir. ]
Why do we say ' when censure is implied?' Observe qrc* CTCTr = ftf
TTH: ' whose king ;' (zftrcff:
fiiow )»
65. A case-inflected word denoting a ' genus
(j&ti) is compounded with the words pot& l a hermaphro-
dite/ yuvati, 'a young female,' stoka 'a little,' katipaya 'a
few/ grishti c a cow which has had only one calf/ dhenu
/milch-cow/ va£ft c a barren female/ vehad, c a cow that
miscarries/ bashkaya\it c a cow that has a fUll-grown calf/
pravaktpi c an expounder/ Srotriya ( a learned Br&hmana/
adhyapaka l a teacher/ and dh&rta c a cunning fbllow ;
ancV the resulting compound is called Tat-purusha.
Digitized by
Google
250 Irregular Tat-purusha. [ Bk. Ch. I. § 66, 67.
As TTtter 'a young female elephant 9 fff*i% ' a female elephant* So
also Ufrveft*: 'a little fire 1 9ffor* «lrr*^ *a little butter milk/ iftij*: , 1W5: ,
«ftaETf: , «Mnj . tfrT^KTCft , «WfqCT ' an expounder of Ka{ha\ SRptfrftrw, ' a
Br&hmana who has mastered the Kafha branch of the Yajur Veda* «fc*immqg :
1 a teacher of the Ka(ha branch of the Yajur Veda.'
Why do we say 'when denoting a genus or a common noun ?' Observe
tapf: * H-H> I ' Devadatta expounder.*
The word qr$ has not a bad signification here. Hence H&§j& means
'a BrAhmaaa well versed in the Ka(ha branch of the Yajur Veda. 9
Wlfere^ «*?RI$ ) »
66. A case -inflected word denoting a genus
(j&ti) is compounded with a word denoting praise and the
compound is Tat-purusha. ^ '
The words denoting praise should be rfidhi (5:ft) words like m i fj ft Hi f
&c. t which retain their specific gender though used along with words of
other genders, in apposition with them, as, ifPHinnr^ ' an excellent cow,' itfC*
**ff§n?f 'an 'excellent horse* irft^ilH' 'an excellent cow.' These words are
generally used at the end of a compound to denote ' excellence ' or ' the best
of its kind. 9
Why do we say ' when denoting genus?' Observe *xmft H<lRh<fcl ' an
excellent virgin/
*5sf^rf%aM*fe*i- oraftfti: , ( €ofa$*o*o*5«inTOfa**5ta ) 11
67. The word yuvd c young,* is compounded
with the words khalati, c bald headed,* palita c grey-hair*
ed'valina c wrinkled, 1 jarati 'decayed,' when they are
in agreement (same case); and the compound is Tat-
purushav
The word **r*ftfir is exhibited in the feminine gender, in the aphorism,
with the object of indicating the existence of the following maxim of inter*
pretation iirftrrff 9wrj* f«*yfirf5je**ifft «rr^ 11
__ ^JligitizeeLby,
-Google
Bk. II. Ch. I $ 68, 69. ] Irregular Tat-purusha. 151
1 A Pratipadika denotes, whenever it is employed in grammar, also
such a crude form as is derived from it by the addition of an affix denoting
gender/
As, *J*T + CT?fr: - ^hgvtftr: . So also grffir: ^ffircit - ^qtJHtft in the
feminine: 'bald in youth.' So^rrf^T: fern. *[??f«mr, ' grey-haired in youth*
^r^rwr: fern. g pref^RT ' wrinkled in youth ' g**K*^ fern. *jT3rc<fr * appearing
old in youth/ (prematurely old.)
wf^r: 11 fre- »n^Fm*y*rnfaTv wir ^mfirt^r ****** , fnjs^ra
68. Words ending with a kjitya affix, and
the word tulya 'equal/ and its synonyms, are compounded
with words -which do not denote genus (j&ti) being in
the same case with them ; and the compound is Tat-
purusha.
As, HlTS8flr* , P{ ' hot food/ wtererpi ' salt food ' qpfrrthrei ' cool drink,
ip*nC%<T: ' equally white/ tfjjj^^r: f equally white.' «UW«1 'equally
great 1
Why do we say 'when not denoting a genus? Observe *t)TS^
•Dr^T: ' eatable rice/ Here the word HfS^ is used as an Adjective
and not as a common noun. Hence there is no compounding even
under 11. 1. 57.
«*n*ifao ) 11
69. A case-inflected word denoting c colour * is
compounded with another case-inflected word which is
in agreement with the former, and also denotes colour,
and the compound is Tat-purusha. Jyt^JfJ^
As frare rry: ' spottfci^ntelope/ « 5 >fc«q irff : ' antelope-^appkd-* with ^Jl ***
red. 1 yoroTCf : ' dappled with black spots* &c. For accent VI. 2. 3. /*f*<r^* V
Digitized by VjOOQIC
t&Z Irregular Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Cii. I. § jo 9 71.
ymc: vrar %ft: nson ^ift 11 ^n*:, sppi-snf^fa* p
^fa: II «gHnr^5f : M*TOTi*flfc *Tf OTTO* , *PJ**lf OTffft mfti N
70, The word kum4ra c a boy * is compounded
.with co-ordinate words &raman& c an ascetic/ &c, and the
compound is Tat-purusha.
In this list of VTCTf and the rest, with the words which are feminine
such as ismm 1 JT^rf^TT, 3|5rer, the word %HK must also be in the feminine
gender ; with the words which appear as masculine, e.g. 4jU||<f<4i, *lftr<k<f3t, ^fft?f
the word spTTC must -also be masculine, because 'a Pr&tipadika denotes,
whenever it is employed also such a crude form as is derived from it . by the
addition of an affix denoting gender.
As, ymfi^wui and *HHNHUJl; 'a virgin ascetic -on a bachelor
ascetic/ _.
1. MTOff a Labouring, toiling. 2. iftrf^Pri — Gone abroad or into
exile. 3. apRT • An unchaste woman. 4. iff^nfl* » A pregnant female.
5. wirtffr - A hermit, devotee. 6. frefr - A female servant. 7. 4t«-u«&
«An unchaste woman. 8. uuoTO ■» A teacher. 9. 3tf>TCT*i « Handsome.
10. qrfcr* «■ Learned, wise. 11. ?| ■» Soft* 12. wsrei - Right, proper,
good. 13. ^q^f » Shaking, trembling. 14. fayr = Clever, sharp, skillful.
^wi^t if$*wf 11 w n ti^ifn 11 igtqnp f nf^^n ;
*if^*^n "*3*4i fcii ftRfir ^u«^n
71. A case-inflected word denoting a quad-
ruped is compounded with the co-ordinate word gar-~
bhryLt, and the compound is Tat-purusha.
^fKirpihft 'a pregnant cow.* *rm«rf*?"a' ' a pregnant she-goat. 9
Varti — It should be stated that the rule is confined to the words
denoting genus of quadrupeds. So not here: — 4*l<4l^fl irf>Ht or tiftwuft
irf^oft f the pregnant cow called KAlAksht or Svastimatt. 9
Why do we say ' quadrupeds ?' Observe fffnrtft irf*l«ifr .* .. " 7:
"-J P>i :| itr-,nHhy(--lOOCy|-P
Bk. II. Ch. I. § 72. ] Irregular Tatpubusha.' *53
*d*T$fao ) i
72. And the words mayfrra-vyamsakd •cun-
ning like a peacock,' &c, are Tat-pnrusha compounds.
These are irregularly formed Tat-purusha compounds. The force
of the word ^ in the aphorism is that of restriction. For though the compound
like h^UjUj* is allowable, we cannot form a compound like qr*
The following is the list of such compounds :— ^ m / ^ a^
i. »ng^ra^i. 2. sfnr^t^r^. 3. '^HMHiit 4. wrji*. 5. ***-
«m or ^cHfCTin the Vedas. 6. qfit^THlor qrfTfT* 7. *wjj§*[*ror OT^S^JW-
8. <r?ehrii sU^r^ir ***&vft as, 9. i^tt*&3. to. ^fort iwtii n.
^ft^iftprc ( firar ) . 12. srttf^TfiSnn . 13. d^rrfcnn . 14. ^ff^nnw .
15. Btf?|^n*Fir. 16. (jftfedtar . 17. *rffffstfhir. 18. Sfcfitftar. 19-
itffrm . 20. ?tff*3i?r or ^rft^r^r. 21. $fr*?r or $tF&t . 22. «nfcqrcr .
23 *ft*lHi . 24. $r^frt>vr • 25. ft*wrr . 26. *3»r£sr . 27. g^r^f .
28. m^c^i . 29. wfc <ratr. 3°- (*TOT*fciT) . 31. wnsrftw. 3 2 -
( 4ji4i(q*Mi ) . 33. $*«ft^*iuji . 34. ^fiw^rr . 35. wn«nr . 36.
^^rf^rr . 37. xwmPn'qi or finro . 38. ^HaPwd i . 39. wnr^ .
40. wifapj. 41- Mi^h^. 42. nmn^ . 43- ; ra^^* *4- Pra*^-
45. Mf%^r . 46. *hi«*i*i<h* . 47. «frf?nfi^tw . 48- jfgrafj* . 49-
3lr*wfr3T^. 5°- <*<mmw** i or ctirarar. 51. PrumflftiJI . 52. fivi-
**ror . 53- *tfft*TOF . 54- sftftwr . 55 fT^* • 5 6 - Wfttftaff M nft
^rl«ir ^PRrrm^srd gnifc nrftnrfa . 57. ?rffiiftr: . 58. stfNtr* . 59*
ITf^f^. 60. ( ?fffCT**: ) . 61. TSTtfFTOr or «**; MJIUqi*iHHmi* f
fararani*£ . 62. ntfmftmn . 63. TOPtsrai . 64. ^rr^r^n .65. qrct-
**nir . 66. ^khi^h<h . 67. «ny*f%ro . 68. m i giftfM s u . 69. wm-
ftfaFTT,. 70. s*prfrw. 71. ftfarcpror. 72. frf^rfr^r^i . 73. TOr.r.
74- TOHjn.
OTgiTizearby xrr©O^TC*^
J
854 Irregular Tat-purusha, [ Bk. II. Ca I. § 72.
10. HW^q^ilJ*.
\
.JMJ^fl'hv.^niO.Ogl-P "■
BOOK SECOND. .
Chapter II.
• ' I K I I I M I
^H^wtm^^^r^^rf^^^ inn *^Tfa n ^fanre-
*Rr: ii jjsR^^Jfjs^n^fWNvJtft' Mwft itoPwt sp^r f ■yfiii^rflw*
1 # The words pftrva 'front, 1 apara 'near/
adhara ^lower/ and nttara Hipper,' are compounded when
in construction with a word signifying a thing that *
lias parts, provided that the thing having parts is
distinguished numerically by unity ; and the compound
is Tat-purusha.
The word 'ekidhikarana' (the unity of substance) is the attribute of or
qualifies the word 'ekade£in.' This debars the Genitive Tat-purusha compound ^_
ordained by sfitraQ}; which would have placed the words ' purva ' &c, last in \$)
the compound, wheteas being here exhibited in the nominative case (I. 2. 43
and II. 2. 30), they take the precedence.
<jf +sGTCr**r - inhero ' the front of the body'; iTTOKr*: 'the back of the
body'; «TOTOtnr. ' the lower part of the body '; and 4VU*|«: ' the upper part
of the body/
Why do we say ' what signifies a thing that has parts ? Observe
*jf IPf: Uiiqui. But not so in ^ tsrwor | rPr?*P* ' invite the fore-most of
the pupils': because here the substratum (adhikarana) is not unity (eka).*
But how do we get the compounds like shafts': ' noon 9 ; qrqTF ' evening 1 ? The
word ' ahna ' is compounded with every word signifying its parts, because we
learn this by inference from sutra VI. 3. 110.
^ Di giti zed b\
Google ___J
f
!
256 Ekadhikarana Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Ch. II. § 2, 3*
2. The word «nf ardha when it signifies ex-
actly equal parts L e. halves, is always neuter, and is
compounded with a word signifying, a thing that has
parts, provided that the thing halved is numerically one;
and the compound is Tat-purusha.
The word «£$ is neuter when it means exactly equal parts or bisec-
tion.
The word n^fil^ and <{4tlft<h<UJ are understood here. This sfltra
also debars sutra 9; as H JflmMC: - »?£ftarefr ' a half of the pepper'; **£
^tgrorft ' a half of the Ko&takt.'
Why do we say • when it is neuter'? Otherwise we have qmT& ' half
the village 9 «P!Tr£: * half the city/
The word ' ekadeiin ' must also be taken here. Thus in the sentence
•TO mW&WW ' a half of the animal is of Devadatta'; we cannot compound
the word • ardha ' with • Devadatta/
The word 'ekidhikarana' must also be taken here. So we cannot com-
pound H# fl i'Jo fr lf ^ * the half of the peppers/
tn^mv cnrrat *wftf 11
3. The words dvittya, € second,' tritlya ' third,*
chaturtha 'fourth/ and turya 'fourth,' are optionally
compounded with that word which signifies a thing*
that has parts, provided that the thing having parts is
! distinguished numerically by unity. The compound
i so formed is called Tat-purusha.
I ' (y . Thi$ also debars sutra^ By the force of the word • optionally 9
i aised here, II. 2. 9. also applies. The prohibition contained in II. 2. 11. as to
the compounding of a genitive with an ordinal, does not apply here ; for that
rule can find it* scope in other ordinals than those mentioned here.
As tipftt PterniT: - fttftaftwr 'second begging/ When we apply
I sfltra 9, we have P ftn ft tfW- So also with the words qrftafiMT, ■Jtjtfftw,
1 ; Va r/:— The word gfl* * fourth 9 should also be included. As fkm~
$<W or mfhlflWTf •
. ^.by
Google -
Bk. IL Ch. n. $ 4-6. ] Irregular Ta-t-purusha. t5t
But we cannot form compounds, for reasons given in the last sOtra,
of the phrases fttfW ftwrw faiprw or fttfW ftwmi^ .
fjcft^nn , ( wtwfiwwgo ) n
4. The words pr&pta * obtained,' and £panna
'obtained' are optionally compounded with words ending 1
in a second case-affix and form Tat-purusha compound.
The anuvf itti of the words • ekade£in ' and • ekldhikarana' does not
exist here. This aphorism states an alternative course to rule IL i. 24. Thus
we have wnftf%3i: ( imft sftfirarf ) or g flfohMl tf: 4 obtained his livelihood. 9 So
also wrsrsftft^: or sftfofOTW : .
^^f: 11 TRHmjiiwwlRr ^RTfr^ wrfa'ir *j«i*3f frf ^rwifa^MftHiun^wi-
5. Words denoting time are compounded
when in construction, with words denoting the object
whose duration is measured by the time, and the com-
pound is Tat-purusha.
5 This is also a kind of genitive compound. As fret JfTtRJV *■ irqirro
'a month old' (born a month ago.) So also 3*WC*K«*: 'a year old.*
csnprm: ' two-days' old.' &c.
* fa: 11 T^^Pfinr e^&r *i? ^wt *njsw fsronff *wfa 11
frfVl^v 11 «nft 5T^T»*^rfr ^ 11
6. The negative word nafk is compounded
with a case-inflected word with which it is in con-
struction, and the compound is Tat-purusha.
As H HTO*r: — HfngTCT: 'who is not a Br&hmana/ (though a man). The
«r of f.is elided by VI. 3. 73:
Vart\~- The *^of *r is also elided even when the second member is
a verb, provided that censure is implied as W^ftr Vi W«f ' thou cookest not
O knave/
— D . i g i t i 7 . e dJ ay .
Google.
158 Irregular Tat-purusha. [ B*, II. Ck. II. $ 7, «.
.. . The word ipj has six senses: — (1) OTJTC* ' likeness or resemblance'-;
as tliniTC 'one like a Brihmapa and wearing the sacred thread &c'. t but not a
Br&hmana, but a Kshatriya or a Vaisya/ (2) aranr * absence/ ' negation/
• want, 9 or • privation/ as Htm * absence of knowledge/ (3) ^f: • difference '
or ' distinction/ as inr ' not a cloth, but something different from or other
than a cloth'. (4) H«TOT ' smallness/ ' diminution ' used as diminutive
particle, as aiwftt • having a slender waist. 9 (5) WflXTCHr ' badness, 9 'unfit-
ness/ having a depreciative sense, as ironv * wrong or improper time. 9 (6)
Atfr * opposition/ 'contrariety/ as spftfir. ' opposite of morality/ 'imroora*
*irt*^ 11 is\ ^pjf^lWftPf***^ 11
7. The word Ishat * a little,' is compounded
with a case-inflected word which does not end with a
kyit-aflBLx ; and the compound is Tat-purusha.
Varti — It should be stated that the word iq\ is only compounded
with words expressing qualities (adjectives), as $qq*iK: 'a somewhat proud. 9
Y<r qftfr < rf : ' a little brownish.' f^f%3fe: ' a little hideous.' fqjfPT ' a little rais-
ed/ t^tanf a little yellow/ {<rffwr * a little red/
Why do we say ' with words expressing qualities 9 ? Observe |mwi«4: I
there is no compounding here.
^fti: 11 iwrf 5***! fwvi wvftjf «f otto?) toctv fPircft *wft 11
qiftf* 1 ! 11 $wH*it istit «wi«i fflr *nwi^u
8. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
compounded with a case-inflected word with which it
is in construction ; and the compound is Tat-purusha.
As nm J*ft - cnrj**: 'the king's man ' fUHUW**M- • the Br&hmana's
blanket* \ *
Fir/:— When a word takes the genitive case because of its connec-
tion with a word ending in a kpt affix; that word may be compoundedwith
such a kpt word. Rule II. 3. 65., states the conditions when a kpt-formed
Digitized by
Google
Bk. II. Ch. II. § 3, 9. 1 Irregular Tat-purusha. 259
word governs the genitive case. Thus {umpro f Ja hatchet 9 ] (a fuel cutter)^
Hcmim<H : • PalAsadestroyer. A>^- C+ZZ*>
Why do we sa> so ? The very fact that a special rule has been made
for the compounding of genitive cases governed by kpt-nouns, shows that
other words which take genitive case by some special rule, are not so com*
pounded. Such as the genitive cases ordained by II. 3. 38, 5i f 52. In fact the -^
genitive case ordained by any rule of PAnini, other than II.J3. 51, is a * pr§ti- '
padavidhAna' genitive; and a word taking genitive case according to those
rules, is incapable of composition; see vArtika under II. 2. 10.
titffqoQow^R 11
*jf%r: 11 unrarftft: «* sit «rc^ ttq?w orofr *tfir 11
9. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
compounded with the word y&jaka 'sacrificed &c, and the
compound is Tat-purusha.
The compound which was ordained by the last aphorism, would have
been prohibited by Rule 16 in the case of *nw &c.; hence the necessity of.
the present aphorism to guard against such a prohibition. As ftimu«H*W: * a
BrAhmana's sacrificer/ irfft^qiJI*: * one who sacrifices for Kshatriyas.
( 4141*1$ ) •
1. imw. 2. «nt*. 3. srftro*. 4. ifttro. 5. <rft**«.
6. f?ro or wnr* . 7. w*rra . f. rompc or roif* . 9. ?gfa .
10. He. it. si. 12. cmro*. 13. qftnrapir. 14. He. 15.^.
16. *#*?. «
Vart\ — A word in the genitive case is compounded with a word
expressing a quality which abides in the former word. As nmgri: ' BrAh-
mana-caste/ ^f^HP*: ' sandal-scent/ qrffcfTO ' the wood-apple juice/
Varti—So also with an adjective in the comparative degree ; and the
sign of comparison ** is elided. Thus m*M %$***: «*****: 'the
whitest of all/ wM iff^r: - «fam{ • the greatest among all/ This
1 vArtika' is an exception in anticipation to the next sfltra which prohibits
composition, when the genitive has the force of specification. Thus criqsr *ft:
1 a cow whitest among all/
3iflilgfiti,tr
v Google J
S60 Compound Prohibited. [ Bk. II. Cm IK 4 10, t i*
^f*r. n fosfns! wrff srr «r *roit n
*rPfo*£ it ifirt^finiPrr ^r *£t h shw<i ffil ^w^[ 11
10. A word in the genitive case is not com-
pounded with another, when the force of the sixth case-
affix is that of specification (nirdh&raija).
With this sutra, begins a series of exceptions to the composition of
words in the genitive case. The separation of one from the many, on account
of its genus, attribute and action, is called ' nirdhirana. 9 As ^Tft*t *i^i|Wl
ggpro ' the Kshatriya is the most powerful amongst men/ fjTOjT *T*f ^wfrnw
' the black cow is the most milk-giving amongst cows/ vjIQVWIMf tffcflW 'the
runner is the swiftest amongst walkers/ This form of genitive meaning
' amongst, 9 is ordained by sutra II. 3. 41.
Va r/z-^-A word taking a genitive-case by force of any rule other than
sfitra II. 3. 50, is never compounded. See sutra 8. Thus the following words
are never compounded <JpiMttfK*^ % ■DT^tlTR^ •
^^^gfgcn^^gtg d^ii^Hifvi^^ ^ it i\ u w$fk u
11. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
not componnded with a word having the sense of an
ordinal, an attribute, or satisfaction, or with a participle
ending in the affix called c sat 7 (III. 2. 127) or an indeclin-
able, or ending with the affix tayja, or with a word
denoting the same object (i. e. f when they are in apposi*
Hon).
The word 'artha 9 joins with all the first three words, as (t )5nrr°rf <fo?.
'fifth amongst the pupils ;' CT^rnrrpT T7JK. (2) qiram *n**^'the blackness
of the crow/ THrono*: tftstp;- (3) qrarct ^fjlf: ' satisfied of fruits;* <£?VFrf **: .
(4) KHSnrT^T *$% ' the doing of a BrAhmana ;' KlflUJUl *J*H: ' the doing of a
Br&hmana. (5) ffTOTOr fBfT * being done of Brihmana/ UTOTOf J**T. (6)
ffftPTCV ^T^p^. When however the affix is «mn( having the indicatory n
(III. 1. 96.) there is compounding as mW"H»&g 'the Br&hmana's duty. 9 (7) flif:
TCfayra** 'of the king Pataliputraka 9 qfftj^: <JM4iKt* • of the *0tra composer
e n a i nzgd ' by v jQQQiC '
Bk. II. Ch. II. $ 12-14. ] Compound Prohibited. 261
.'■I ■ ■ III — w^ ^^— - — — ■
PAnini/ We can however form a compound like the following WldtHmfiUft: I
By the general rule relating to words in apposition contained in sfttra II. 1,
57, the difference between that sfttra and the present, is as to position of the
words. In the genitive compound the genitive word would have stood first
if compounded ; not so in the other, there the quality stands first*
12. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
not compounded with a word ending with the affix *kta, f
when the force of c kta' is to denote c respect ' &c.
The affix ^f is added in the sense of inclination, understanding or
respect by sfttra HI. 2. 188. The present sfttra alludes to that aphorism when
it uses the word ^iff: and pftjA itself is used only as an illustration and includes
the other two significations of ' kta' also, namely mati ' inclination/ and
buddhi ' understanding. 9
.As n*rt «HT: — J^— 'if*** 1 ' l ^ c *" n g wishes, understands or respects/
Why do we say 'when meaning respect? When 'kta* has not this
signification there is compounding. As BPTffof ' pupil's laughing/
( *o**H n is* ) ■
^fa: 11 M Pra^rnfiw i *r nit n ***** 11
13. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
not compounded with a word ending with the affix 'kta,*
when the force of the latter is to denote c locality* in
■which something has happened.
When the affix fff is attached to roots denoting ' fixedness, motion
or eating*, it gives the sense of agent and of location in connection with the
action denoted by the roots 1. e. f that the action is located by the agent in
this or that site (III. 4. 76); as %&*t *m\ ' here they have gone. 9 f*9*f y**\
•here they have eaten/
vmvn % n « • ^^r 11 «*?fa f * t ( soto* * ) »
^Pi: iisrifa , **r*rfl , «r*fpiwilii
14. A word ending with a sixth case-affix 19
not compounded with another, when the force of the
genitive case is that of the accusative.
Digitized by
Google
fc**Jt-»J*.rt«.-'
m Compound Prohibited. [ Bk. II. Ch. II. $ 15, 16.
— ■ ■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■»!■ 1 .... mi
The anuvritti of W does not extend to this aphorism. The word karma
qualifies shashjhi. Sutra II. 3. 66 declares the conditions when, instead of the
accusative, the genitive may be employed u *., when the agent and the object
of the action denoted by the nouns formed by krit affixes, are both used in a
sentence, the object is put in the genitive case and not the agent; as HTV^f Tff
frft*fipn**3i8? ' th e milking of cows without a cowherd is a wonder. 9 firot *!)?•
trc* HPtf frf^ft • eating of rice agrees with Devadatta.' ^P| *!5j T^: tiH
V^f^T ' the drinking of milk by Devadatta is indeed excellent/ fkfam ^5*t
frf%: ^rprl^ff 'wonderful is the structure of sutras by Pinini.'
(«*toI n) ■
15. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is.
not compounded with a word ending with c trich 1 or
* aka/ when the force of the genitive case is that of aa
agent. -•...-
The word 'kartari' qualifies the genitive-case. The affix £^ is taught
in sfitra III. 1. 133, and the affix H* is not a single affix ; all affixes that
have an element 5 are trv; such as a J^ or jn or yr (sutra VII. 1. 1.) Thus
**W: JJtfi&R 'your honor's repose ' *r**l wfirar ' your eating' HTOMTOfftOT
1 y° u r going in front, 1
The affix ^ is employed always in forming nouns of agency ; hence
there can be no example of a word in a genitive case having the force of an
agent* governing another word also having the force of an agent The C^
therefore serves no purpose in this aphorism, but applies to the sAtras . that
follow.
The genitive has the force of an agent under conditions mentioned in
II. 3- 65.
Why do we say 'when it denotes agent'? Observe flJHf^T^t $^*mn%.
vafc * « 14 n *^ifSr 11 ^sft f * (w*£foq*m«ii«i) 11
^r: u^fr^^enr^fn^rf^rf H*«r^RW*ii
16. A word ending with the sixth case-affix
is not compounded with a word ending with c trich * or
«aka* affix when the force of these latter affixes is that
of an agent.
The word 'kartari' qualifies the word 'aka' only and not 'trich/ for
the latter always denotes the agent and nothing else.
fr i gft i ggcJ"by
■Google-
1
Bx. II. CH. IL 5 16-18.] Nitva Tat-purusha. S83
As Hit Wfff • the creator of waters 9 jet %m 4 the destroyer of cities f
<niFr 4rrf ' the holder of thunderbolt. 1
It might be suggested that the word *$ being read in the class of
TOCT (sAtra 9) ought to be compounded. The word *£ there means 'hus-
band/ while in the example we have given, it means 'holder.'
The above are examples of words formed by «^.. Now we shall give
examples of words formed by *&r, thus •Itfr^r 4frT1R ' the eater of rice/ vngri
Vmwz: ' the drinker of saktu.'
• • • -
17. A word ending with a sixth case-affix is
invariably compounded with a word ending with- aka,
when these affixes denote a sport or a livelihood ; and the
compound is Tat-purusha.
This is a Nitya-samisa incapable of analysis. This anuvptti of
the word ' na' which began with sutra 10, does not extend further. The affix
ST*( never has the sense of sporting or livelihood; the only examples possible
are of ' aka.' Thus ?{l<*4i3*TOfr*ir • a sort of game played by the people in
the eastern districts in which uddilaka flowers are broken or crushed/ So
also *resrysr*rer fa5n > ' a play of gathering flowers. 9
So also f^ra^T^f: ' one who earns his bread by painting or marking % ^22^1j
the teeth.' TCT^onff ' a nail-painter by profession.*
Why do we say • when meaning sporting or livelihood. 9 Observe
$nftm^i: 11 ** n x^xfn n g-irftra-w^s f ( 9*90*'
ffa: 11 *? irRr mw: wfr *r«*n*rN *f ftnt ****** nfj^vfnrmt wRr m
*rftf*H 11 in^itr *pirotif wrer 11
*rftfo{ 11 bwhw: nsFmiwf fcftarr 11
^(rt^^n *w^: ^zratr snfhrar 11
wrf^nj 11 TOfofr mwwJ ^ui} 11
wrPf^n Pirn**: i*F«raraf q^**r h
*rf*tfj 11 ft* *? Aurepmft fir*n«P?l<n viivrtftewt >j took 11
Digitized by
Google
264 NmrA Tat-purusha. [ Bk. II. Ch. II. § i&
18. The indeclinable wordku 'bod,* the par-
ticles called gati, and the prepositions pra, &c, are in-
variably compounded with other words with which they
are in construction ; and the resulting compound is Tat-
purusha.
The word ku means 'badness or sin 9 ; as, *£J?«r ' a sinful man 9 ; (2)
Gati (I. 4. 60) as, TOfrgrrf ' having asserted 9 ; (I. 4. 61.) gffigrftfi r M
So also with the words * Sec., when they are mere particles and not
used as 'upasargas,' or 'gati'; as J^ meaning ' bad/ in jcj^v 'a bad man 9 ; so also
9 and nflr meaning ' respect 9 in <|fTO ' honorable man 9 ; tlft^TO 'excellent
man 9 ; nr means • a little 9 as niftier: • brownish.
•
Generally these are attributive words but they are found elsewhere
also, as <Wor «|*"P[ or *tft**\ 'tepid.' So also J«fRP( v nfireyf^ and •tf^JPf II
Vart: — The words ^ &c., when the sense is that of ' gone 9 or the
like, combine with what ends with the first case-affix. Thus um/if: € a here*
detory teacher 9 ; so also V&TOft •
Vart: — The words •?»"% &c, when the thing denoted has the sense of
'gone beyond' or the like, combine with what ends with the second case affix.
As «fftfCT?*r: W^T* - MflW^: (I. 2. 44 and 48) 'without a bed-stead/ •iflro:
* exceeding the necklace in beauty. 9
Varh — The words •?* &c, when the thing denoted is ' cried out 9 &c. f
are compounded with what ends with third case-affix as HfiJC: ^tfarenw — *??
^tfcvR • what is announced by the cuckoo 1 1. e n the Spring.
Vart: — The words qft 8cc. f when the thing denoted is 'weary 9 &c v are
compounded with what ends with the fourth case-affix as <rfc5infMUl*prrw
*<riK*ppr. 'weary of study. 9 %?rt^TTfr: 'wealth 9 (sufficient to support a maiden).
Vart: — The words f%^ &c. # when the thing denoted is 'gone beyond*
&c, are compounded with what ends with the fifth case-affix, as fiv^jrt**:
' who has gone beyond Kaus&mbi '; so also Puflllfe : .
Vart:— A word enters into composition with ^% 'like 9 ; and there is
no elision of the case-affix, and the first member of the compound retains
its natural accent, as WRpfrftf ' like a word and its meaning/ *rcr€t{* • like
two garments. 9
Vart:— Prohibition must be stated of * &c f when they are ' Karma
pravachaniya'; as <jtf qf% fcftn* faijq; f the lightening flashes in the direction
of the tree.' ffrj Iff^l *nnf JrfH 'Devadatta is good towards his mother. 9
T'by^crrOO^'rvr*
Bk. II. Ch. II. § 19, ao. ] Nitva Tat-purusha. MS
^ftf: II WTfffayf *Pnl* &MNMftu Mf WF*i I^MM Wfllt lift H
19. An upapada or attendant word (III. 1. 92),
which does not end with a tense-affix (III. 4. 78) is in-
variably compounded with that with which it is in con-
struction. The compound thus formed is Tat-purusha.
Thus «JH*K: ' one who makes pots/ imiuis ' one who makes cities*
Why do we say 'which does not end with a tense-affix 7 Observe
g MW I f l cqft mtfa * he goes to bring fuel.
It might be objected, that the question of compounding with a word
ending in a tense-affix is irrelevant ; since the anuvptti of the words f|^ Ijw
is understood here, so that firtj will find no scope. To this we reply that we
should infer that the words g* fpr should not be read into this and the last
aphorism. The following Paribhisha also arises from this sfltra.
" It should be stated that Gatis, K&rakas, and Upapadas, are compound-
ed with bases that end with kpt-affixes, before a case-termination or feminine*
affix has been added to the latter/ 9
The result is that Upapadas and Gatis are rot compounded by sfttras
18 and 19 with case-inflected nouns, but they are compounded with pri-
mary nouns before a case-termination or feminine affix is added to the latter.
The same considerations apply to k&rakas also. Thus H&fiMt ' a female
brought in exchange for a horse/ is formed correctly. M^r iford W • tfgv
wilt* ; add *ta (IV. i. 50) and we have HX**fWt . If on the other hand, the
feminine affix rfr had been added to ffHn previous to its composition with
M^f the form would have been Hj[?qtfrir » and we should have had no base
ending with short H and in that case rf^ could not have been added by
IV. 1.5a
20. When an upapada is compounded with
an indeclinable , then it is compounded only with those
avyaj r as which end in the affix «m.
,JDiqiTgfdhy\7,00glf
1
'il;
\
t6« Optional. Tat- purusha, [ Bk. II. Ch. II. $ jo 9 21.
This makes a restriction . to the general compounding of upapadas
with avyayas as ordained by the last rule. As wjqfrf ?P^ ' ^ c cats having
made bis food sweet 1 So also fffrorf * having seasoned/ The avyayas
ending in H\ are formed by the affix ^q$j (HI. 4. 26) &c.
Why do we say 'with avyayas ending in ifij? Observe «n3t4t«P(
' the time of eating/ Here the avyaya ends in *n of the affix 35* added
by rule III. 3. 167 (the affix tumun may be applied, when the word in con-
struction is not a verb, but qSTOf , BH* or twr ' time/)
The force of the word only is to indicate that this composition
takes place in those cases where a rule ordaining only, after any root with
regard to any upapada ; so that no composition will take place where the
affix s|i{ as well as another affix is ordained after a root with certain upapadas.
Thus sfitra III. 4. 24, declares: " the affixes ^f and ny^ come after a verb
when the words irf , SOT and <$ are upapadas." Here the *V{ (affix «m^) is
not the sole affix ordained ; but there is a co-ordinate affix with it namely *a •
Therefore in tpNta^ ' having first eaten 9 there is no composition because
•W^ffaPJ is not the only form we can have; for, «i^|^T is also used in the
same sense* *
«-■«.-.«•.■
21 . An upapada ending with a third case-affix
(III. -4. 47) &c, is compounded optionally with an inde-
clinable formed by the affix w^and the compound is Tatl
purusha.
The term M^ is understood here. The upapadas ending with a third
case-affix &c. y are given in sfitra III. 4. 47 and the sfitras that follow. As
*^H^^Uf J^fr or vgrNisffT^Nf $*?£ ' he eats after having relished the food
with radish.' So also < rrjth r fr l or qf ^WlTCTfrg* <M (III. 4. 49) ' he lies
pressing on his ribs/ For upapadas ending with other cases, see sfitra III. 4
52 &c. This being an ' optional rule, it is not necessary that the upapada
should be tulya-vidhftna with the *V[ ; so that this optional compounding may
take place even under rule 111. 4. 59 where M^is not the only affix enjoined,
but there is ^pf as well. This vibhishi may therefore be called both m* and
iPTO vibhAshA. It is sm with regard to those rules where W is the only affix
employed; and it is sinnc with regard to those where %p^ is not the only •
affix: • . r .
Digitized by
Google
Bk .II. Ch. II. 4 2204. ] Bahubrihl jB67.
«mt*n\«w ) 11
22. An upapada ending with a third case-affix
or any other of the remaining four cases, is optionally
compounded with a word ending with the affix kt\r&;
and the compound is Tat-purusha.
This rule provides for avyayas ending in ^f which the last two rules
did not provide. Thus we have **$: f»wr or **4: fRir . Here the affix ^f f is
added by sfitra III. 4. 59, In the case when there is composition, the ^f f is
replaced by the substitute *q\; otherwise not See VII. 1. 37.
The condition of the upapadas being in the 3rd case &c. f applies
here also. Therefore there is no composition in H& f^rr or 9$$f*r 1
iNt «jaMf : K ^ H T^rft 11 ft*: , qgsftf*: ( «o ) H
^Pi: 11 tim wwit ^ftff^ft *tf*r 11
23. The remaining compound is called Bahu~
yrihi
A compound which does not fall within any one of the rules given
above, will be Bahuvrthi. This is a governing aphorism and extends up to
sfttra 28. Thus PtWJ: 'possessed of a brindled cow/
^pff: II **fof HifiW^M.tMf *T&Wt WW& *tfftffV WfVit *nSi II
*tf**H II ^?#fr. * MHlfa*i w lHlfrft **B**\ II
jri**^ 11 «i«wrrt n wr *tf*ww: 11
vRf^ 11 wT^rrr^'ifWt^rif^rv *ronr: 11
*rPfo*^ 11 'nftj^srofat *^?fti**f ^Nrrpftav ?rw 11
*rfi5** 11 ^Rr^rr^^f^wftci^rt *^rflfW*wf: 11
24. Two or more words, ending in any case*
affix, form a compound, denoting another new thing,
not connoted hy those words individually ; and the com-
pound is called Bahuvrthi. ' '• • • -
b i ^ i tizeaby ' GOQgte -
S8$ Bahuvrihl [ Bk. Ch. I. § 24.
' The Bahuvrthi compound comes ywith the force of all the affixes but
the first; as SHT*** qi* - Sltflf* m* ' abater-reached village/ *TOfr,rT|r^
• a bull by whom a cart is drawn/ mqumHkK: 'Rfidra to whom cattle is offered/^ ^^
tf^Awr Wl*» • a vessel &fwhich tke^£?£«e^^ ' DevadatU poi. "*
sessed of a brindled cow/ <fcy^6 l TO 'a village i^ss^sed <>yjjroic men/
Bahuvrthi compound is not formed with the sense of the first, case.
As ^? $% «nfi • gone when it had rained. 9
Why do we say 4 more than one'? So that there may be compound-
ing of many words, as in the following verse :— ^
4 Why was the daughter of the king of the mountains married by
Siva possessed of beautifully-delicate-locked-hair, and cheap-deer-skin-dress/
Vartz— Bahuvrthi compounds are formed of words having the same
case, so that words not being in apposition are not so compounded; as *f^ft$«-
Far/:— The compounds of indeclinables are Bahuvrthi ; "as 4«3$H(:
• possessed of raised mouth/ So also 4HI$< a: &c.
Varbr— The second member is elided in a Bahuvrthi compound of
which the first member is a word in the locative case, or a word with which
comparison is made (4V1M). As, qr»i (%*?*: 9irat J?W — *i«fc ?EI*f: ' in whose
throat there is blackness (Siva)/ CTftHrfft: 'who has hair on his chest/ 3*£W
J^TR* 5^ ^^T «: - ?*{£Qt ' he whose face is like that of a camel/ CT$QT
• ass-faced/
Vartz — Bahuvrthi compound may be formed after eliding the second
member with a word in the sixth case denoting ' collection or modification/
As 3tXTRt ^faW ■» *ilHlMI<!: f ^IT^nwvjPf^w ■» *iJP*j?: * he who has a collec-
tion of hair as crest' <prfcv fir*Tft**KrfMW • y « SfrUfclC 'he who has orna-
ments made of gold. 9
Vart : — The optional compounding of what arises from a verbal root 4
coming after ^ &c should be stated, and the elision of the subsequent term.
As inftai <rafatw » *|4: ' a tree of which the leaves are all fallen.' So also
Vart : — The compounding of words signifying what exists, coming
after the negative *pj should be stated, and the optional elision of the second
of the terms. As, MftttPTPT jft **» - nyf: 'childless/ So also WT^: 'wife-
less/
Vart :— Compounds like HftfltflTT should be stated as Bahuvrthi* As
tffcltfTT unrtt f a Brlhmant having milk/ These words are indeclinables.
The word 'asti' here is an indeclinable though appearing as a verb. %
Digitized by
;<5ougle
~L
compounded with another soft- „
a T3a>m-itt*flvi . . w/ . j * . _ *#.
Sk. II. Ch. II. $ 25, 26. J Bahuvrihi. 169
25. Indeclinable words and the words &sanna
c near/ adfira * near/ adhika ' more f and the words called
sankhya (Numerals) are
khy& word, when tho eonee?
kfey&. The compound is Bahuvrihi *^Iu/ oj*o£ <ZPZaj^*u A*.
Thus g^ror : (V. 4. 73) • those who arc near ten i>. nine or eleven/
Similarly tTffiqy: 'nineteen or twenty-one 9 (VI. 4. 142). So also •raWTO?: 'nine
or eleven/ MtfjmjT: ' nine or eleven/ Mf^CfQT: 'eleven**
So also two * numerals ' may be compounded; as, fiftr : * two or three/
firoff: 1 twenty/
Why do we say • with a numeral? Observe f% ftnPfft 'five BrAh-
manas/
Why do we say ' with an Indeclinable &c*? Witness inviT <frf.
Why do we say v when denoting a numeral 7 Observe HftCT ftjjfir *Nnj
' of cows more than twenty/
( W30 ) n
^t%: 11 ftr^wifa fflwufi »j*<hi3 *r«t fpw^t *£?ftff * frorcfr «nft 11
*rPfo\n «#*!*& ^Iwrit jwr 11
26. Words which are the names of the points
of the compass are compounded, when the compound
signifies the intermediate point, aud the compound so
formed is Bahuvrihi.
Thus {ftprgtf^ dakshina-pflrvi, -* south-east,' (the direction midway
between south and east) ^THICf 'north-east/
The word mn is introduced in the sutra to indurate that no compound-
ing takes place when the words denoting direction are derivative words
whose primary signification is not indicative of direction ; as $?9TO«tatfrf
(VUk*fe»<UM^ ' the point between east and north/ Here the words tfrft * cast'
and ^rtlt • north * though denoting directions, are derivatively so, and hence
no compounding.
s
Digitized by
Google
J
J
I
170 Bahuvrihl [Bk. II. Ch. II. $ 37, 28.
Far/: — Whenever a Bahuvrihi gets the designation of SarvanAman
(I. 1. 28, 29), the first term becomes masculine, by VI. 3. 34; as fftTW +
w& ( Wigjftff: ) n
*ftr: ii ntflr ****** to* qt 5#fir *r stftaF* nfl^toRm rg *PN*fr
^frflffV OTFElf *wfir 11
27. Two homonymous words 1 both being in
the locative case or both being in the instrumental case)
are compounded, the sense being l this happens therein
or with that' The compound so formed is Bahuvrihi.
The word *p* means * a word in the locative case/ and ft? ' a word
in the instrumental case. 9 The word tot or 'simitar form' applies to
both. The word ffH indicates that the meaning of the compound so formed
should be learned from popular usage, therefore it means, ' seizing, striking,
fighting/ All these senses are implied by ffHr. The word is exhibited in the
locative case, if the sense is that of seizing; and the word is exhibited in "
the instrumental case, when the sense is that of striking; the word indicat-
ed by the word nft«% is ^ ; as *{hr*?JTr* n *T#m f* ^f ^k - *0T*f|r
(VI. 3. 137 and V. 4. 127.) * hair to hair, fighting by pulling each other's hair';
^tnfffr • hair against hair' ; tc$w TO^V Ww *f *g& ^ - TCTTffq? ' stick
against stick, fight with stick and stave;' so also HjtMl^lfrO ' • In the above '
examples the sam&s&nta Affix f^ is added at the end by rule V. 4. 127; and all
such words are Avyaya or indeclinable. The final vowel of the first term
is lengthened by Rule VI # 3. 137.
Why do we say * having the same form 7 We cannot form such a
compound from the following : f&? yrehl WW *f *jrf ^1*1 .
Hi H^ cJWlftSt H *l II Ttftfk II fc* f *;-*% , gw-"
*W * ( w*5»tf** ) 11
^Hf^^ftft II
28. The word saha ' together' is compounded
withVword ending with the third case-affix and the
compound is Bahuvrihi; provided that, the companion
and the person accompanied are equally affected hy any*
action or thing, in the same manner.
Digitized by
; y Goo^le
■1
BK. Jl. Crt. II. $ i8-3d. ) PURVA-NIPAtA IN DvAMOVA. Vfl
Thus *f Jt^innn-SJT: (VI. 3. 8a, «f changed to « ) f he has come
accompanied by his son 9 . «*5Pt: 'accompanied by the pupil. 9 OTtfac: c accom-
panied by the servant 9
Why do we say ' tulya-yoga *? Witness fti* ^Jjpf: jipifc Wffa q^fr
4 the she-ass carries the whole burden, though there exist her ten sons/
How do we get the forms like fra&ff: , crcttTOn , «TO«K: &Ct in
which there is no ' tulya-yoga ? It shows that this condition is of limited
operation ( jfij ntiRPTtf *lfo& ) .
m 5^5: « ^5 II tl^rfit II n-«nf , 3*5: f ( «03l5** ) H.
29. When a set of several words ending with
case-affixes stands in a relation expressible by 'and * the
set is made into a compound ; and the compound so form-
ed is called Dvandva.
The meanings that may be indicated by^r ' and 9 are four, (1) <j^^:
'community of reference/ (2) H?TPW 'collateralness of reference, 13) |<l¥<H*)i|x
4 mutual conjunction ' and (4) ^HTfTC: 'aggregate/ In the first two cases vim.$
community of reference, and collateralness of reference, composition does
not take place, because the words are not directly related to one another
(II. 1. 1). Composition • is enjoined therefore, when the sense of ^ is that
of mutual conjunction and lumping. Thus we cannot compound f $*tf" *[?" ^T
*nrcr ' reverence God and thy Guru 9 or PmTO? «rt <*R* 'go for alms and bring
the cow/ But we can compound the following mrar npfNn - OT«>«Mn ft
'the Plaksha and the Nyagrodha trees. 9 So *m Hgftr-TOfgr*" , ST^Tl *
***** SF* n \* n *v6r 11 vmtai, ykn (^iros) •
30. The upasarjana(L 2. 43) is to be placed first
in a compound.
The word fPffd is understood here. The upasarjana being the word
exhibited in the nominative case in the rules relating to sam&sa, must stand
first. The constant application of this rule has been illustrated in the pre*
vious aphorisms. Without this rule, there would have been no fixity as to the
position of words.
. *f*f : l| \i*i^iR^ TCJTO^# *4taH^ M
3
Digitized by LiOOQ IC
tit * PURVA-NIPATA IN DVANDVA. [ Bk. II. CH. II. § 3 1 .3 J.
31: the upasarjana is to be pat last in the words
B&jadauta &c.
Thus tnifff: ( flPrf CHIT ). f a chief of teeth f («>., an eye tooth). It
is not merely the upasarjana that is placed last in these examples ; but
words which by some other rules would hare stood first, stand in this
list as second.
1. *i*nw • *• H^r^. 3- fay^iRjq^ . 4. *npjfq^. 5. ftrotf-
T^.- 6. «€wRj<i% . 7- n?fs*TOt. 8. nftftfo*. 9. (itffttv^). 10.
**Pinrj. it. ^ggwyEref^. 12. fi^rerf^^. 13- r*y^- M- w*ff-
^ft . 15. ( •nc^nnwr^rtif )• 16. f^wmiHfl*^. 17. h^^^wj. 18.
jgcn$^. 19. 9r<HMJHi4t . 20. Atq^ttm^itk. 21. Mfoj^t* 22. ?itov^.
23. jji^tiK 24. trefcff. 25- ^nrmf. 26. titf^rek. 37. »rfwf..
28. iitNiPn. 29. 9«tRh<i^ . 30. nnnrrtpj. 31. (vfti^isi^ • 32. irtaife-
wrrprcm . 33. ( ^refwfrgwsni ) . 34. TOrerara; ^ . 35. ( <gffrroig -
nr*^). 3 6 - ^pre^- ?7- (w^gRre^). 38. ;jtfK4fhi^. 39. (frirrr*r>.
40. ftr^rwn . 41. ( RrgncwO • 4*- fawwnfr . 43. ( fe*?9Tf* ) .
44. ^nqfrpft' . 45- 1*1* . 46- i**# • 47- frarpfr . 48. 5^n» . 49*
3*n^. S°- *OTW or ^sJjft. 5*- Gjttfk^. 5*- ftrfWhnj. 53-
ffcflnif*. 54- «fW^fT. 55- wiffrfr. 5 6 - wrefr. 57. wn#.
58. tpi^ 1 . 59- ^RRT^ -
5*5 fa » ^ U ^if^ « 5*5 1 ^ » ( *W^?K) »
32. In a Dvandva compound, let a word called
fa (I. 4. 7) stand first.
As fftftt ' Hari and Hara/ So also qf^jA and 3£[vt. Where
there are more than one such ft words in a compound, any one may be fixed
upon as first member, and the rest to follow no fixed rule. As <tzft+ WET* or
Why do we say ' Dvandva? Observe RrSTCTj: which is Tat-purusha.
^f: II HiTTO^* tf€**r<f **J STClS <jt UqlttWll II
*lM*i*{ 11 n^cqPtai: II
^fpfopj 11 c2**rw*4$^f fttl%^5^ 11 •
33. In a Dvandva compound, let what begins
with a vowel and ends with a short «f be placed first.
■ ■I ' »■■! I I IMWIX I " I— M" » V
Digitized by VjiOOQ IC
>< T wt ., ' ilmWA ftA *.» ... A * JU *^ J*-* i"*.*-»»*A*ff*«*A!ta-3U^ J«V IV lutltfi HnJ*<m.
•BK. IL CH. II. f 33, 34- ] PURVA-NIPATl IN DVANDVA. Vft
Thus, JKjGlll ' the camel and the ass/ ^HAW^t ' the camel
and the hare/
Vart: — When there are may such words there is no fixed rule. "-As
•mrtorr. or I*JTOTCT: I
Varti — In the Dvandva compounds the fir would stand first only then,
when the rule of «YWT<rw does not prohibit it Thus fsyr^ft or {3JOTY . Here
H?* and ffj though fir, do not stand first, because f?g beginning with a vowel
and ending in short by, by the rule of vipratishedha takes precedence (I. 4. 2).
* • t • . . # . . , .
Why do we say ' H\ with a f( (I. 1. 70)? This rule does not apply
when it is long w as mqnr + ^t. - *?**T^ or yn& :
* ^^^ II (TOftf ^ fcPT^ YTORPI II
*rfifa?^ II *P*f$ti * <j? frnifOfa ^r^K^II
Wi^*^ II ^"llHIHIJ^ifeT ^JRnw: II
wif^^nj 11 wpy ^TR^r: ^crfirrrrfr n
. ^rflfr*^ 11 *to*rer •? wftroiT: ^Ifinirit **ror: 11
34. In a Dvandva compound, that word-form
which has fewer vowels, is to he placed first. .
Thus fWT + 5^*^ - SWWPftA ; and g4Hafl<*HHH»: ||
When there are many words, there is no fixed rule. As Ttaj^PrfhUT:
or ffttmxt^pfm •
I Vart: — Names of seasons and stars consisting of equal number of
syllables should be arranged in the compound according to their natural order
of succession. As f*F*rffr f^rcTO^r: ; PwTPfnft; frfirarffWfipn •
When tliey do not consist of equal syllables, the shorter should be
placed first; as «flmqq*A .
• • -
7" } Vart: — A word consisting of light \laghu) vowels U placed first. As,
Vart: — The more honorable of the two is placed first;' as, tmnrfTOft
1 mother and father/ Mlp3$ ' faith and intelligence' {hfrnmft 'initiation and
austerity'. * ............ ,, . . .
m i n 1 ii m i ■
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
V*
V<
5*74 PURVA-NIPATA IN BAHUVRIHI. [ B*. U. CH. If . § 3* t 35.
ii i) >>. > itf
Varh- ♦The caste* are placed according to their order: as, unrcmflnf
ft^fpfT f Brihmana Ksbatriya Vaiiya and Sudra.' There is no limitation
of equality of syllables here.
Varti— The name of the elder brother is placed first ; as wftfttt$if}
1 Yudhishthira and Arjuna.'
V*rh— -Among numerals, the less in value is placed first; as ftwf 'two;
*pd three* ; fa^n ' three and four/
*s*ft &ifc3l sjijhft 1^1 *^if* r f^wt f fwta^ ;
^uPSw^ii fra*w: ^ftii8 irJ inpifcsr: *wwmf kk\\\
35. A word with the seventh case-affix and an
epithet are to be placed first in the Bahuvrlhi compound.
In a Bahuvrlhi, all words are upasarjana, and hence there is no
rule for their arrangement* The present aphorism declares that rule; as
iW^H** ' who is black in the throat 9 So also qrcfeffra , f*WP[: , $RWp .
for/:— The sarvan£mas and the numerals stand first; as fritftp ,
«$F"i: 1 ftTJJT- 1 ft$W • In a compound formed by the composition of sarv^*
oima words with a sartkhyA word, the latte? should stand first ; as,
Fir/:— The word ft* may optionally stand first; as *£cfrc. or
Vart>— After the words if^j &c, the word in the 7th case-affix comes
as subsequent ; as «IT^W: ' a hump necke d '; tnrffrrr. &c.
(low is then the word ^T^: 'hump in the shoulder f to be
explained? This is governed by the general rule, and not the excep-
tional v4rtika. v - f ;
Digitized by
Google
**■» . &rt ■m-p.i^M— ^r^fc- ^ 4
Bk. IJ, Ch. II. §. 36-38. ] .• — • Optiomal Purvahipata. W
— — — — — . —————— — ■ ■■ 1 1 ■ ■»
36. What ends with a Kishtha(L 1.26) shall
stand first in a Bahuvrlhi compound. • . . -
Thus jfrtfif: f one who is devoted to devotion 9 ; fnror: * one who has
made the mat 1 ; ftf^ptprt lff: ' one who has begged alms. 9
Vartz — A word expressing j&ti (genus), time, or pleasure, is placed
subsequent; as, i)l$*i*4t , 4141*114: , and <Jf§JllJf: &c
Far/:— The. words ending in Nishjha or in the locative case stand
subsequent, when coming after words denoting ' striking 9 ; a*»ffg*nr 'ready
with sword 9 ; TCgqrftj: ' holding sceptre in hand. 9
( Qivji ^j* 1 ^) •
37. In the compounds Ahitftgni and the like,
the Klshthft-formed word may optionally be placed first.
Thus M'Mlfifc: or MifldrpT- ' one who has consecrated fire. 9
6. ^prftH • 7. 4ttfta *8» WWW • 9* | WW •
t- «npni* . j. 144311^ • . 3. (arcjuw) • 4. frnftppjniMft •
This affftmflr class is ikptigana; so that words like ifj &c., must
be looked for in this class*. ""
«*TO: JOTTO* II \L II Vqifk II W€Klt 9 «TO*fe,
(«m% $f* ) 1
38. The words kag&ra^L and the like 9 are
optionally placed first in the kaj-ma-dh&raya.
Thus «fKJ)ftft: or ifr ftftqPirc: Ka^irajaiminifc or jaiminikagirafc.
♦The tawny Jaimini. 9
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
■ 1
ii
»6
Optional Purva-nipata.
[Bk.1I.Ch. H.538.
I. . 55Ut . 2. tJ^CT • 3. ^f 5f . 4. JSJfcC • 5. Wf . 6. ^|pr .
7. fisifif • 8. inr . 9. .*pi . 10. ftigvr • it* fay . 12. ftjps • 13*
. v 20. ^tir •*
This sfttra enjoins an option where by general rule guna words being
attributes would have invariably stood first.
Why do we say ' in the karmadh&raya compound 7 Observe CUT-
j^it m*c ' a village of tawny men/ which is Bahuvrfhi. Here ends the force
of I. 4. i and II. i. 3.
-:o:-
V
Digitized by
yGodgle
■ mtw m.- —
BOOK SECOND.
Chapter HI.
*rJR*i«i^ ii
1. The word ' aaabhihite ' meaning c not being
specified 'is to be understood as the governing word.
Whatever will be taught from this point forward, should be under*
stood to apply to those cases which have not been specified otherwise. The
case-affixes like those denoting 'object' 'instrument' &c, are applied to a noun,
only then, when the force of the case-affix is not otherwise denoted or mention-
ed or exhibited. The force of a case-affix may be so denoted either by first,
the conjugational affixes Pi** ; secondly, by the Primary affixes or ^, thirdly,
by the secondary affixes 3h£<t ; or lastly by compounds. Thus sfitra 2 declares
that the second case-affix is applied in denoting the objeet, as q*? qrftftl ' he
makes the mat'; irrf n^jfa 'he goes to the village/ But the object can otherwise
be denoted. Thus by the passive conjugational affix, as $rc3 3RT: ' the mat is
made.' Here the termination of the verb denotes the object. See sfitra I. 3.
13. and III. 4. 69. So also by the kr/it affix, as ^f; *&: ' the mat is made/ see
Sutra III. 4. 70. So also by a Taduhita affix as sp** or $rft3?: meaning
'purchased with a hundred' - jjefcr ifrer: . Similarly by samlsa, as unrj^i 3R^
s^ro fjcftm 11 ^ 11 v^t5* n «*fa , f^atan n
\fa: 11 sKHfrVj ^rc* ^r *hit *nr fitfhrr Rpifa* $*fa II
srPfopj 11 T<rot?rcfr: sra? Pnrnjfftj frj 1
*rf3*pj 11 HPfcr.-Tft-*: -*r<w ft *<rr *r-s?;?r-*fr*?3 ^ n*S 11
2. When the object is not denoted by the termina-
tion of the verb, i e. when the verb docs not agree with
it, the second case-affix is attached to the word.
Digitized by
noogte"
.<> »-
278 Accusative case* [ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 3,4.
The terms dvitiyA &c. t arc technical phraseology of older gram*
ma nans, and hence not defined by Plnini; they apply to the triads of g^
affixes. q& 9iftft • he makes the mat/ mn inofH 'he goes to the village.'
The words OTCT: , *$*'- , fa*£ and the double forms 3<r§raft , wfta »
W*fa, when they have the sense of nearness, govern the accusative. Some*
times other cases also, as THtnft itf 'on both sides of the village 9 ; B$*t wt 'on
all sides of the village*; fc*??f*f 'fie to Devadatta'; wfrlft m^'just over the
village 1 ; Wlfa or Mtfhft *&&[ ' just below the village. 9
Varti — The words KpfcJ: , nftQ: both meaning ' round ', enrar f f%*CTT
both meaning • near ' and ff ' woe be to/ and iffa ' to/ govern the accusa-
tive case; as, vrPWlr qr*nj 'round the village/ mA €r«niT 'near the village'; fr
?***f ' woe be to Devadatta'; «pjfapi*ir ifiPirfil fi&fcpj 'to a hungry person
nothing occurs to his mind/ See I. 4. 49 &c.
^cfhn * ftav^ft if ^ 11 tj^ifa n fjcftm 9 n 9 $Y: 9
wsJ* $ ( *E*fa ) n
^jftR 11 ee*ff% f%^ -wfnl: ^5fer *rr£ stfhsr tfwft? 4*fa fitfhn ■* u
3. In the chhandas (veda), the object of the verb -
hu l to sacrifice 1 takes the affix of the third case, and of
the second as well.
*
This ordains the third case-affix ; and by force of the word 1 ' and r
the second case-affix is also employed as qqi'^lfferffrf sjffrfif ' he satisfies or
pleases Agni with barley-powder/ or srenjfffcTfW sj^Ri 'he throws barley-
powder into the fire as oblation/
Why do we say ' in the vedas?' In the classical Sanskrit, the accusa-
tive only must be used and not the instrumental.
qreRMnfrqg^ ll 8 U *^lfa II 3?nK! , *FZiX*t 9 $** 9
^f^i: 11 ^raJ^i^**^ Gm<ft srrs^qf^ «ji?^ 1 *n«rf ntf fitftvj f%npi?
4tftu
4. A word joined with (or governed by) the word
antard, or antarena takes the second case-alfix.
The anuvritti of dvitiyA is understood here an<J not that of tpttyA.
Both these words antarA and antarena are NipAtas. They govern the ac-
cusative. This debars the genitive case. The word antarA means 'be-
tween' while antarena means/ besides that/ ' without/0 exception/ 'with
reference to' 'regarding.') As. HWQJ J^q^f * foF*3l^ 'nothing can be
V
Digitized by
G'O^gle
*tf' w uww a
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 4-6] ACCUSATIVE CASE- 179
gained without exertion. WOT or H^Qj trf <« ?N vrty. 'the bowl is be-
tween thee and me/ *U«l*rf «tf V^ ^ *fa*Tl ' who else but thee is able
to retaliate.'
Why do we say 'when joined with?' Observe *&tm *TOlft*fH
WFrei-wft ; ( %atan ) h
5. After a word denoting time, or length, the
affix of the 2nd case is employed, when denoting fiill
duration.
qre>rfr$ 'he reads for a month/ 'he studies full one month/ *f£
q^qiuft ' prosperous during the month' (uninterruptedly), *frU5? J«W 'flower*
during the year continually/ iRfit ^fi^i f# 'the river winding for one kos
without any break/ iffrtf <r|«f: 'the hill through one full kos/ *pff faffr *TO^
^ Ni l lWW qr 'O king the hall of Visravana is ioo yojanas in length/
The word *T?q?<reirtir or ' full continuity ' means the complete rela-
tion of time or space with its action, attribute or substance.
Why do we say ' atyanta-sanyoga or complete continuity 7 Observe
*TOW ftrvflS or i^MNiW ***• M
TOFRtoA ) »
6. The third case-affix is employed after the
words denoting the duration of time or place, when the
accomplishment of the desired object is 'meant to be ex-
pressed.
Hidw^fHRlrjtJta: 'he learnt the Anuvika in a month/ ffirchTT*?raftj4hr:
'he learnt the Anuvika by going over a kos/
The word *T??*? means 'the finishing of an action, on the attainment
of the object intended by the action, but not before/ Thus ^ Nmt^RT T
«RtJ v ffa: means 'Anuvika was perseveringly and effectually read by him
in the whole year/
When the idea of apavarga is not intended, the accusative case is em-
ployed, as *TRPnfW]rJ$fra: 'learnt for a month, but not yet completed, the
Anuvaka/
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
_ __-. J I.
280 Accusative Case* [ Bk. II. Ch. III. $ 7-9.
«rre<*nafc , ( vrenstRto ) n
*ffc 11 TOyftSi ^ 4V *n*wnft *Mrt wnfr <r^**ft finest *mr. n
7. A noun denoting time or place gets the affix
of the seventh or the fifth case, when the sense implied is
tliat the time or spac3 is the interval between one action
and another action (or implies an interval of time and
space between two k&rakas).
Ex. *ro ^m fcrf^fr *J> «J*rXP?tair ' having dined today, Devadatta will
dine in or after two days/ Here the 'time' is the interval between the
agent and his power of eating. So also {f€*fttaft*?nsr: jfityTT^ f£td *r B^#
fiMr^' standing here, he will hit a mark at the distance of one kos. 9 Here kos
is the interval between the agent and the object, or the object and the abla-
tion, or the object and the location. The rule I. 3. 10 does not apply here.
8. The second case-affix is emplo3 r ed after a word
which is joined with a karmapravachaniya ( I. 4. 83),
Ex. xrra^v*;? ^.g ffprprrfa ' It rained on (hearing) the reading of the
Veda by SAkalya.' So also wrenprarf^n^ SW: II
9. Where a word is gov *5rned by a karmapravacha-
niya in the sense of c more than' ( I. 4. 87 ) or 'lord of ( L-
4. 97) there the 7th case- affix (locative) is employed.
Ex. yrerrqfo ilOT: f A Drona is more than a Khdfi/ arfcfTST? 1 ^ ^Nr<*n
'Brahmadatta is the lord of PanchAlas.' The phrase q rert^TC *PF* indicates
that both the thing owned and the owner may be in the locative. See
1.4 97-
This aphorism debars the accusative.
Gbftgle
Digitized by
• 'jt- H.-^j.fc'i-fc... ,> \*\j*.\-*.,s.*^*e*
Bk. II. Ch. III. $ 10-12. ] . Ablative case. 281
^Rfn: f ( ^jmvlhgo ) b
10. The fifth case-affix (Ablative) is employed
when a word is governed by the following karmapravar-
chaniyas i. e. apa, 4fi and pari.
Ex. s*T or w or qft *i*;*!yrr*r^?C ?T. 'It rained off or upto or with the
exclusion of, Pitaliputra/
The tR* here has the meaning of ' exclusion ' (I. 4. 88) being read
along with ar? ; therefore, not here ^f qft friitat fawj (I. 4. 90).
nfa^ f * , *re*n^ ( «5no ) ( tj^spft ) n
*jf%: 11 *OT*sf?»f%fir*rv nftopi ipt *tfqwftag* i^rft fircfigfafi i 11
11. The 5th case-affix ( ablative ) is employed after
what soever is governed by a karmapravachanlya in the
sense of i substitute ' or ' exchange \ I. 4. 92 ).
Ex. *TftH*4< *pm: lf% 'Abhimanyu is the representative of Aijuna/
* l«lH*ftft»| HT: ijfinps&ft ' he exchanges mdshis for this sesamura/ See I. 4. 92
for an explanation of stftftft and qpTSFT .
*i?*$^fa Qpftmigwft fr g muwv q fo n 9^ a q^f^ n
12. In the case of roots implying motion, the place
to which motion is directed takes the affix of the 2nd
(Accusative) or the 4th (Dative) case in denoting the
'object,' when physical motion is meant, and tho object
is not a word expressing c road 9 .
Ex. in** or qprf* *r«a[fir 'he goes to the village/ But not so in inwrr
?fic STORt (the verb not denoting physical motion) 'he goes mentally to Han'
nurnf »T*3tfir ' he goes over the way ' (the object being the 'way *). Efut not
so in Bffc*f TOfil 'he cooks rice ;' (the verb not denoting ' motion) 9 nor in
Utt? JT^rfir (the verb not denoting ' the object/)
Digitized by
Google
r
I i
282 Dative case. [ Bie. II. Ch. III. § 20, 12-14
Hotc. — The word adhvan includes the synonyms of road (I. 1.68) as
Notr. — The prohibition applies with regard to the going over or
.occupying the road ; so that where a person from a wrong road goes to the
right road, there the fourth case-affix will be employed as <nl iresffir •
<*<nff *an^ 11 ^ 11 ^if^r 11 ^pff , ^rnji% n
^f*r. 11 *ifr* wr* ^rmff fintf*rf*fir 11
<rrf^^ » ^*nff (%*rfr *m& <v\4*k*M\ \\
qiW^H II TOT#5T «IJUI|J1|3 *%%$ q-rfctqj 11
qiW* 1 ^ 11 f^nJW* ^j^ff ^fwwir 11
13. In denoting the sampracl&na-k&raka ( I. 4. 32 )
tlie fourth affix or the Dative is employed after the
noun.
Ex. «muirqi4 irf **rf?r 'He gives a cow to the teacher * t???tn? <t^
* it pleases Devadatta * (I. 4. 33) y"*«r: *grsRr (I. 4- 36) 'he desires flowers.'
Yariz— The fourth case-affix should be employed when the sense
is that of ' for the purpose thereof ' as *£TPT ^TF ' wood is for making posts. 9
^RORTO Rc^g ' gold used for the purpose of making ear-ring/ 4!**Wf4| ^IRrft
1 pot for the sake of cooking/ STCf^FTnffcjJaSt 'mortar for the sake of threshing. 1
Yari: — The verb f|<r and other verbs meaning ' to be fit or adequate
for, result in, bring about, accomplish, produce, tend to/ govern the dative
case: as, *\*m <h^4<) *J*n£ ' the barley gruel tends to produce urine.* So also
'grre ?£to« *uq3 *c *wi*p •
Varti — The fourth case-affix is employed with the force of f indicating
a portent or calamity/ as.
*nirer qrfren f%*j*mRrr*r 3HH* 11
1 The reddish lightening portends wind, extremely red indicates heat,
yellow portends rain and white lightening prognosticates famine.'
Yari: — The fourth case-affix should be employed in connection with
the word ftn: as nt^^tfl^ * good for cows/
^fri: 11 ftrotfrrrc^r ^ ^frotiT^stHFrcq ^iwt; mftfir tttivji ^yff fipf.^f
Digitized by
GUOgl
Bk- II. Ch. III. § 14. 16. ] Dative case. 28S
14. The fourth case-affix is employed in denoting
the object (karma) of that verb, which is suppressed
(sth&ni) in a sentence, and which has in construction
(upapada) therewith auother verb, denoting an action,
performed for the sake of the future action (kriydrthe
III. 3. 10).
In other words, when the sense of an infini-
tive of purpose formed by c tiimun * and 4 iivuP(IIL 3. 10,)
is suj)pressed in a sentence, the object of this infinitive
is put in the Dative case.
ir&^fr STiTi^qrvfraT^ JTsrlH ' he goes for fruits 1. e., to bring fruits/
This debars accusative case. So also we have <^3f: graft 'he goes for fuel/
The words farepfr fa^q and ^n^r^ are in apposition. The first is a Babuvrthi
compound of ftr^nJ + OTTf a °d means ' a verb whose upapada denotes the
purpose of the action (kri yirtha).' Thus in irvrFrr? ^ ' to bring fuel' ; the
infinitive verb STff^sr is farourTT? > the object of this verb is !&:; when this
verb is suppressed, it becomes ^uft*f: ; the object of this verb takes the
fourth case-affix.
Why do we say ' of the verb whose upadada denotes the purpose of
the action ?' Observe stf%3J frit* •
Why do we say ' in denoting the object/ Witness ^a^t W*fH ^ra&r
'for fuel he goes with a cart/
Why do we say ' when suppressed' ? Observe tp?H!?f JPlfir •
i^irt , ( *H*if ) 11
15. The fourth case-affix is employed alter a
crude-form which ends in an affix denoting € condition 9
(abstract noun, III. 3. 11.) and having the force of the affix
turn (or Infinitive of purpose).
Ex. 3?rrnr snrft 'he goes to offer a sacrifice ' "*j«f spifa. So also
The word H*nS means ' having the same significance as the affix ipj\
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
t ,
S84 Dative case. f Bk. II. Ch. T0jJ 16-17.
16. The fourth case-affix is employed in con-
junction with thd words namah ( salutation, 1 svasti
c peace/ sv4h&, svadh& (terms use d in offering oblations to
Gods and Pitris respectively), alam c a match for * c suffi-
cient for* and vashat a term of oblation.
Ex. *pfr St**: , «f%*r top*: t wwrt*** • *vxt R^ran , *ret *$r tow
1 Salutation to Gods'; 'peace to the people*; 's villi to fire'; 'svidhi to the
Pitfis'; 'an athlete is a match for an athlete' &c. The word M5* includes its
synonyms also, as s?g: , ypR: &c; so qnfu{*&l4 , *TOH# •
The n indicates that the Dative will debar Genitive, in spite of II. 3.
73, in the case of these words, though used benedictivley ; as 9 «rf%9 ift**f ijqiqjl
*n*re5iprei^ f^Hi^nwiftg awn n\ifk 11 w-*^Pi t
«Rt^ , fawn -, swnftrf , ( *3*ft ) u
17. In denoting the indirect object, which is not _
an animal, of the verb manya c to think,' the dative case
is optionally employed, when contempt is to be shown.
Ex. *r W WSJ *°irar *r 1*^ ' I do not consider thee worth a straw/ *r W
5# 5^W *f *&*l * 1 do not consider thee worth a chaff.' Why do we use the word
H*H ? Observe sy sjr *nrf Ptf^rarft • The optional dative will not be employed
with the synonyms of the verb ir?qft. So also the sutra uses the form *?if with
the vikarana *ir^, indicating that it is Dividi that governs a dative, and not
the Tanidi ipr ; for the latter governs the accusative only, as «r ttf W«i *R# •
When contempt is not meant, the verb does not govern the Dative,
as:—
*i*w*J frt h& , *rrft GKtzH<*\im*\\ 1 Haiiqiui *jtf h*% iw *fRir «r «n7Tftr 11
' I consider a rock to be a stone, I consider mortar but as wood,
I consider him to be the son of a blind woman whose mother cannot see. 9
So also when the object of comparison is an animate being, it will
not take the dative: — as H *tf U € *ttti H*$ 1 1 do not consider thee even as a
jackal.' The case of «r **f *gfr H^fr is an exception.
Varfr — Instead of using arofaj in the sutra, the word SCTftrrft^ should
be used. The following words belong to Nividi class, they are always in
the accusative after the word ir^ , never in the Dative:— *ft 'ship/'qmr 4 crow/
*p* 'food/ sjpir 'parrot,' and ipim 'jackal.'
Digitized
byGoOgfe
BK. IL CH. III. $ 18-31. ] INSTRUMENTAL CASS. tSi
«?}*r»wt mftm *%i* r^xfk n *nj-«wt: qatar 1
^Pi: 11 w&R ^irt ^ <tiii4t cftwc Antf^? 3*ft •
18. Iii denoting the agent (I. 4. 54) or the instru-
ment (I. 4. 42), the thiixl case-affix is employed.
Ex. J^^r ftf 'done by Devadatta/ jpN SJ^rf% 'he cuts with the
sickle.' So also, *or?*(? Jpff^ f WTO forflf II
Vart: — The following words take the 3rd case. Hffa * original/ qnr
'almost/ *ft* 'gotra/ *H ' equal/ fire* 'unequal/ foftl!T, <^W and 91*9 as urtnj
irrftr*: , mritf 4:1* utw* , ^fo'or fqrc$«r *n*!% , fttr*r «tftarf% &c.
( *?frn ) n
*[fa: 11 9$rirr *pftjirar* &<ftaf fwftrfwfir 11
19. When the word ^r* 'with/ is joined to
a word, the latter takes the third case, when the sense is
that the word in the third case is not the principal but
the accompaniment of the principal tiling.
Ex. jpfa HfHPl: (TO 'the father has come with the son/
The same will be the result with the synonyms of «f as, jiN mfi
'with the son/ So also when the word Qf is understood, as PAnini himself uses
in I. 2. 65 ^ **|T &c. t
Why do we say 'when not the principal/ Observe, Qp9w
*l$4l«ll*lW*li: •
^n^ finunc: 11 ro 11 u^ffSi h Sfa , «f -f^Bir , (sahn) •
^ftf: 11 3nijf*r fijfr^drf^Fflir firarft w^rt Mutator f%*tfts4qft 11
20. By whatsoever limb, being defective, is
Qointel out the defect of the person, alter that the thiixl
case-affix is emploj r ed.
As, M^UJI 9iFGJ: ' blind of one eye' <f&H f#if: • lame of foot/ TlftfT *pgff:
&c. The word ai) *a in this sft.ra applies to the whole body, whatsoever by
reason of being a member of the body is defective is indicated here*
*c^s*rcre3t 11 ^1 11 <i^ift « Tc^^cr-wa^ , ( sahn ) »
4*firu
Digitized by
Google
S88 Instrumental case. [ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 21-24.
21. Any mark or attribute, by which, is
indicated the existence of a particular state or condition,
is put in the third case to express this relation.
9f?rf*rctttTO: 'he is an ascetic by (the fact of his having) matted
hair.' *rft HTPJ W?<5*r OTPncrwfoj 'your honor might see the student
by the fact of his having a kamandalu/ So also ffPHftTUTTO* 'a teacher by
the fact of having students/ f^rcm "TftfllH**t ' a ParivrAjaka by a tuft of hair/
But not so here, q»HmffilflUttH: ' a student, has kamandalu in his hand/
Because here in the compound ^'Hltiwrfcix is hidden the mark.
Why do we say ittha-bhuta? Observe «Jtf njx ftcitotfl
**fa , ( 'q&m ) r
^fa: 11 *rfc* *ircrt: *tf>i nzwi fatomrf hihuijmwwI enton fVifr s
22. After the verb sam-jM the third case-
affix is optionally employed in denoting the object.
fi^nr or fatf tf srnft^ 'he knows his father/ *mrr or w*t qfapftft II
H* 11 ^ 11 tnpfa n %cft 9 ( *i<afcn ) n
23. When a word denotes 'cause,' it takes the
third case affix.
fiTWJT ^WT-'by learning there is produced fame/ >^#5f 3£«fi( 'by
wealth, family ;' ^i«-qm sffa*: ' by daughter there is grief/
The word $5 here is used in its popular sense and not the gram-
matical hetu (I. 4. 55). Any thing capable of accomplishing a desired object
is called hetu.
<H*«$3l q*^R* II R8 II ^Tfa II 3F5$f< , *ft $ xrs^Hi 9
(W)H
*fa: 11 *tuc*f^*i ^r* fwwr: q^f* f*Pif*ir$?Rr 11
24. A word, implying debt, Considered as a
* cause' but not as a kartri or agent, takes the fifth case-
affix.
Ex. qrcnT3: f he has been bound on account of a debt of a hundred
pieces/
Digitized by
GooglF
Bk. If. Ch.' III. f 24-27. ] Case-affixes. 287
Why do wc say ' when not denoting the agent ?* Observe jjXh *f»W: ;
'a debt of hundred has thrown him in prisou '; here jj* being considered as a.
prayojaka hetu, is an agent and takes the third case-affix.
stfanfm , ( \& v*nft ) n
25. The fifth case-affix is employed optional-
ly when the noun expresses a:i attribute, being the causa
of an action, and not being of the feminine gender.
Ex. Jrrcq# HWfll^ *T W& * he has been bound by reason of his
dullness/ <rt(%t£ft or tffirw^y*: ' saved through learning/
Guna-vachana nouns are generally abstract nouns. Therefore not
here vrk* ^51^ . If an abstract noun is of feminine gender, this rule will
not apply, as J^wiT or H$m 5^: ' he was set at liberty on account of his skill or
wisdom. 9
**3* %3*qtfl 11 33 11 n^rfSt n mgt f ^ *-Traft 11
^fa: 11 ?ju«?w *** * A «fa* nit fip*f*rf*rfir 11
2G. The sixth case-affix is employed after a
noun implying the cause of an action, when the word
hetu is used along with such a word.
Ex. anrc* ?*fir faf% 'he dwells for the sake of food/
*rffo«i 11 Pf ftTnmi u i?a ** ra * irar^ri i«
27. Alter a sarvau&inan (I. 1. 27) when it sig-
nifies th,e cause of ail action, and the word hetu is used
with it, the third case-affix is employed, as well as. the
sixth.
Ex. 4R* or tfo iiprt *€fa ' for the sake of what does he live ? 9 *t*
or ifar J^f I TOft •
Vart\ — When the words frftra or 5*rc«r are so used, almost all the
case affixes may be employed ; as f% ftSr*f or $ft PrSr^j or w& Pffiranf or
*€irfw3r?T^ or **** ft.**** or *sf*i\ ft. - *^ **ft . Similarly with the words
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
288 Ablative case. [ Bk. Ill Cm. II. § 27-29.
kirana and betu. Here also the word fcj does not mean the word-form hetu
(I. i. 68) but its synonyms also; as f% tffJPf or qfr *Wtw#* or «*fr M3l<HUI
yi/5ct{ 11 %*ft«r% ^ I rTOTWPr^ 11
srftN^ 11 Rum4M4l*j H*^*ft *^**r m
*irPfapj 11 wraitioiitiftflM *ph Tf^ft **k*w 11
wififo^ 11 wro: to*t frstf n totot 11
28. When the Ap&ctona-karaka (I. 4. 24) is
denoted, the fifth case-affix is employed.
Ex. ifPrr{m*G[f* ' he comes from tlie village 1 (I. 4. 24) ; \£vft fiftfir
(I. 4 25), uronrni <rrnra* (I. 4- 26) &c.
Varti — The fifth case-affix is employed in denoting the object, when
the verbal participle ending in *n\ is elided ; as WOTfTrerjl flltf - strove
jfurfr *he sees from a palace.'
Vart:— And under similar circumstances In denoting the location the
place where an action is performed is put in the ablative case, as, stop)
3Tf%S*r3fT$«*mpn^5wl 'he sees from a seat. 1
Far/:— In questions and answers, the fifth case-affix is employed:— gpft
*TCP^? f n?fSfJ'rrf ' whence is your Honor coming ? From Patali putra/
Varti — That point of time or space from which distance in time or
space is measured is put in the ablative case:— as, ipft^TiT: vtancrf ^TOTfft
4t«WlPl ' Sankisya is from Gavidhuma four yojanas.' 3CTF$*^tt sfravrecR' «n#
'Agrahiyana is one month from K&rtika. The word denoting the distance
in time is put in the locative case, as mif .
Vart. — In the above the flrord denoting the distance in space may be
put either in the nominative or locative ; as irfhyjni: *rhKH*f ^TOtR" ^tTTTft or
*v$$ ^nA% I
fipifa*4*i* II
•V
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 39-31. ] Genitive case. " 289
29. When a noun is joined with words mean-
ing 'other than' or with &dtt € near or remote * or itara
* different from ' or pit3 € without,' or words indicative of
the 'directions 1 (used also with reference to the time
corresponding to them) or with words having aiichu c to
bend 1 as the last member of the compound land expres-
sive of directio a), or with words ending with the affix
&ch or &hi (V. 3. 36 and 37) the fifth case-affix is employed.
Ex. BT**fr, RrrfT , **rft , Wlfarf , fiRfrcrrr V ?^^n^ f different from Deva-
datta' MTtT^ faf^f 4 remote from or near to Devadatta.' The word Ar4t
meaning ' near or remote ' would have taken the sixth case-affix by sfitra 34,
but this enjoins 5th case-affix. ^^tofTO^ 'excepting Devadatta.' <{Stf gmr^ 'east
of the village/ ^T^t iTPTRt 'north of the village/ <gff tfrcrnt TO?*: 'the spring is
prior to summer' itfc* 3R3*?r wrrqjto the east or west of the village 9 ffij^f
ffwurft ^T mHl\ ( to the south or in the eastern direction of the village.'
The words like xtf^ &c, formed from the verb anchu are also f^^jvp ;
their separate enumeration shows that the sixth case-affix ordained by the
next sutra does not come after them*
30. The sixth case-affix is employed when
used in connection with words ending with affixes hav-
ing the sense of the affix atasuch {V. 3. 28).
The affix *m*J^ is ordained by V. 3. 28.
Ex. mror *ftrw ^nrnr $nFW*lTlft*r 'to the south or north, fore
most, in or above the village*' /
Vim fjgta ii ^1 11 vqfa 11 i^wt t f^nta h
31. With a word ending with the affix c enap*
(V. 3. 35), the second case-affix is employed as well as
the sixth.
Ex. *ftT^T 1HRJ WIW *r ' south of the village/
Digitized by
Google
__J
I 290 Case- affixes. [ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 3*-34-
] 5%: ii w^farr mm t**% *rfr *#*ir Rr*fari*ftr n«^mmt T*vfrn u
1 32. When joined with the words prithak
; ' ' € without,' vin& c without f and n&u& c without ' the third
! case-affix is employed, optionally (as well as the fifth and
the second).
i ■
Ex n*n*tf<* trt m RrT jqi[ mm m ' without or different from RAma/
This sfttra may be divided into two parts: — (i) jq*{ f%^rr mmf*: (2)
<t$m\ <S* Qtl<W[ • By this arrangement we can read dvitiya into the aphorism.
y , finr mti Rrar *3 firtj^ronf ftm 1
«*5* * qftvrevinvcfaTOOTamTOQi 11 ^ 11 ^fa 11
*m«ft-3pqa*wr ) 11
j . 33. When expressing an instrument-k&raka,
\ optionally after the words stoka 'little,' alpa 'little,* krich-
chhra l difficulty,' and katipaya c some,' the fifth case-affix
is used, when they do not denote material objects.
Ex. *fcspt tm&r *f 5*ff: and W*TF^: or ygfrryg: &c, • he got off
easily &c. But Cdr&f •%$* ffl: , H^sr *^TT Kfb &c. ^killed by a little poison/ No
option allowed, as it qualifies a substance. So also *5f|<*' J^Rl ' he loosens a
little/ Here t<rfci is used as an adverb and not as an instrument ( SRW ) •
^nf»a«i9: ^TRW^icR^ni 11 ^1 u tnpfa 11 f*-sifei-
^fa: 11 ^nfoPFrif: v*W*t s* faHfarfafa M**rcrnrt <t**vft n 11
34. When in conjunction with words haying
the sense of d&ra 'distant,' and antika 'near,' the sixth
case-affix is optionally emplo3 r ed.
Ex. qpo^ WTW mmt *£ {mt%Z, *Oo4i, iranf, RTOf €*fW *r ' the forest
is distant from or near to the village. 9
m!
/.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
P.k. II. Ch. HI. §34-36.] Case-affixes. - syi
The force of the word *TO3TOtf is to indicate that the 5th case-affix
employed in the alternative, would have run into this sfitra, bad we not used
' anyatarasyam. 9
f^f^snwt fs^hn * II ^H H ^Tf^ II <pC-3!f??!?B-
^1%: 11 yil>q«iga n u*tt fetfhir ft*ft***R* « wwini«ft *#*ifir
35. After the words having the sense of dftra
c distant,' and antika c near,' the second case-alfix is used
as well as the fifth and the third.
Ex. erf en^ ^«i m mmq and *r^<raifli > MfwiJJ*f or *tf~*rai mn& ♦
This rule applies only when these words have their original significa-
tion and do not denote a substance. Otherwise the proper case-affix should
be employed, as *C: q*n: , ^THf *} *f| .
«pwfvre^ f ^ t 11 ^ 11 xp^fk u *inft , «rf^B^ ;
* , ( froftranifat ) n
jftr: 11 HJnft firefofawftnrnsfr ^rc* *narr ^nfrrciPfapr 11
sff^f*v^ 11 «*4tft*r9 ^^foroor *KHuawdmH*t 11
*r?ifo«l 11 irrawwritt n vrff 4**mii 11
qrcRfciPt 11 ^k^i^H I ^rr *k*<) wfr qs&m n
*rf3^ 11 srer K*igH ^rr «rc«ft **tf **&w 1
^rf€*^ 11 nftrafd *t *nnfr **k**t 11
^rf^^p| 11 friH*Hiwi3*&*f ^nnfr **s**r 11
3G. The seventh case-affix is employed when
the sense is that of location (I. 4. 45) as well as after the
words meaning c distant ' or c near'.
Ex. q& *rrcfc ' he sits on the mat* a*fcr£ ^ *f IPW* * near or distant
from the village/ ^ir^rt vrtfH *he cooks in the pot/ Thus the words ^C
and vrf^RT take four case-affixes, namely the second, third, fifth and seventh*
Vart: — Words like arftfli^ ' who has learnt/ tjtfft^ f who has com-
prehended ;' f. e., words formed by adding f?r to the past participle in ^c ,
govern the locative of that which forms their object: — as **>fWt wu<iii4 'versed
in Grammar/ qft*lftnft trfft** ' well versed in sacrificial rites/ tffSFtit fe^fRl
4 well read in the Veda/ See V. 2. 88.
Digitized by
Libog'Le'
19S Case-affixes. [ Bk. HI. Ch. IL § 36-38.
Fur/:— The words «n| and ftTOTJ govern the locative of that towards
whom goodness or otherwise is shown; as unf^T *PJCHP£ *T ' well behaved
or ill-behaved towards his mother/
Vart: — The Locative absolute is used in cases other than those
specified in the next sfltra, namely, in cases where the action done or suffered
does not indicate the time of another action; as 3T3* 131^* ?f<Yr MTO$ * the
poor are sitting, while the rich are eating, 9 fft**r Mmf?5 ^Fjr $TJT# l ^e rich
are eating, while the poor being seated.' So also vice versa. '
Vart: — The Locative is sometimes used to denote the object or
purpose for which anything is done; as.
'Man kills the tiger for his skin, the elephant for his tusks, thechamari
cow for her hair, and the musk-deer for its musk/
to n m$& wnrasnim 11 ty 11 nqxfh it *to , * $
^f%: 11 fro firar i ik* *r **r i&* *r fifrrgrfirarert 5^1* tralr ^htor
37. By the action (bhava) of what-soever, the
time of another action is indicated, that takes the seventh
case-affix.
This is Locative Absolute. ift* \&IHH1H ipf: 'the cows being milked, he
went away* $^*minpi: 'and returned when they were milked' atftt^ ^^RI^
•Hi: f t*K4UMi: .
Why do we say 'by the action of whatsoever'? Observe ^t «rnft:
fry^r. Why have we used the word • action 9 twice? Witness ijjr Jjf* *r
HH V^ II \C l| THpf^T II TO^ , * f 91^*91^ ,
( *jnft f w^*r Mnresrow ) 11
jRc: 11 wnrnRr* iroro* otto q3ta***ft fi p w ft *ro 11
38. The sixth case-affix is employed (as -well
as the seventh), when disregard is to be shown, after
that by whose action the time of another action is in-
dicated. N
This is Genitive Absolute. ***: **fn qr gremft ^'in spite of her weeping,
he went away/ The force of this genitive is that of the English words * not-
withstanding • « in spite of ' ' for all/ &c, H^f: «HTT f* ^IT: ^Wt CRHTOI * the
Coogle
Digitized by
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 38-41. ] Genitive case. 29S
Nandas were killed like so many beasts, Rakshasa looking on/ (not-with-
standing that Rakshasa was looking on).
wf^-tiscWfevft-^^ni-^^ , * , (**H to**) n .
39. The sixth and the seventh case-affixes are
used after words when they are joiued with sv&miii
c master/ 15 vara ' lord,' adhipati € ruler,' d&y&da * an heir, 1
sakshin * witness,' pratibhd ' a surety,' and prasdta * be-
gotten.
*rrf *it* It CTPfr or {*** * master of cows/ So also iHrmfcfft: or
«T>^fa<rf*: , «T*t *f*T* : or iff* *nrf* :, »TCt or iftj JJW* , Jlf^ **
These words naturally would have governed the Genitive; the present
sutra ordains Locative as well.
?pd«n«it , * , s*%*njm , ( ^ ***ft ) 11
f Rt: 11 wg^Klr «wnfcn: ^^t fry*: nwtf $t*t MrcNntf irereranrf nit
40. In conjunction with the words ftyukta
1 engaged/ and kusala ' skilful,' when rneaning entire'
absorption in an engagement, the sixth and the seventh
case-affixes are used after a word.
Ex. W$*fT. SvCTsUr *r *i?*T<i *K*iC«r** *T ' deeply absorbed in mat-
making. 9 .
When not meaning ' deeply absorbed,' the construction is different ;
as STPJxFt ift $r«K* 'the cow is slightly yoked to the cart* Here the seventh
case-affix only is employed.
HcHi f^jH^W I; V) II ^tIhii ito:, *, ft^ Um *^,
( TO*-*F*ft ) II
41. The sixth and the seventh case-affixes
are used after those words from which specification is
made, (as of an individual from the whole class).
i *i >" " j 1 «»» » ■
Digitized by tiOO M?"
194 Case-affixes* [ Bk. II. Ch HI. § 41-44-
fix. int «f|V *T fJ«ir *^fftrr: 'among cows the black one gives much
niilk/ H^UQi^f or i|*J*€jJ ^Tftnr: JJHW .
A nirdhArana or specification is made by separating one from the
many by reason of its genus, quality and action (fl. 2. to).
t**nft fwi 11 8* 11 ^ift ii ***ni t ftvrai , ( *J5W
42. The fifth case-affix is employed when
the thing specified is different or divided from (and not
included in) that from which specification is intended.
This debars the sixth and the seventh case-affixes, as, m*£Kt: <tt?fo-
<Hp*C: ttepnTOCr: ' Mathura is more beautiful than PAtaliputra/
^ftfgnj wm*fari *9?iwft: II 8^ II q^ifn II «ig*
^1%: 11 otj foyr f^iwrf *r*fa*htf *wwww > srsnft Rp?i%4^ * ^ ,
*tf*tt l^qJl II
43. In con unction with the words * s&dhu
1 good,* and nipiuia * skillful/ when they denote respect,
the seventh case-affix is employed ; provided that the
word prati is not used.
»rmft OT>J: or finpi: ' good behaved towards his mother? But smj?*?^
ifflrt nft ' Devadatta is good behaved towards his mother/
Why do we say ' when respect is denoted? Observe, OT^jttftnin
1 the servant is good towards the king/ Here it is a bare statement of a fact.
The exception applies not only to if^f but to other prepositions, like
%R , a?3 &c., as, imtf qft «r^Nf«: H
Tifad1njw«n tpfhn * f 11 88 11 xj^rf^ 11 wf%cT-
*?g*mit , w&m , n , ( wft ) 11
44. In conjunction with the words prasita
1 longing for/ and utsuka c greatly desirous of,' the third
case-affix is used after a word, as well as the seventh.
Ex. fttfrf firarar *r s?TOfi: ' longing for sleep/ *& or **j stf*?*
Digitized by
Google
\'f
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 45-47- ] Case-affixes. *95
*F*ft ) »
45. When an affix declaring the time of an
Asterism is elided by lup (IV. 2. 4) ; the seventh and the
third case-affixes are used after the word, whose affix is
so elided.
Ex. jszr* 3«5 *r q rqamftqm ' when the moon is in the Asterism of
Pushya, let him drink milk. 9 See Rules IV. 2. 4 and IV. 2. 5. So also TOlfc
qcrafcf **T*| TH??ter* . But not so here <f^*r$* TOfa c he lives in Panch41a\
Here the country is meant, and not a star, though here also there is elision
of the Taddhita affix.
Why do we say • lup elision ? Observe qm% qf: 'the planet in the
Maghi.' Here there is no elision. But why not in ara^c*: y a?crfrf%5flT. Be*
cause they do not denote location, which is understood. It is when location
is expressed by such words that we may use the third case-affix in the
alternative.
xnft^w^fefqfCTra*^^^ Ji*nn 11)^11 ^Rpfir ■
^f^r: 11 i?rfsrTit^irtj | n# R^jj-hi^ sRhihw^ ***«wi*l tohc fipfRsfafir 11
46. Where the sense is that of the 3Sbmiual-
steni (I. 2. 45) or of gender only, or measure only or num-
ber only, the first case-affix is employed.
Ex. xT^t: 'aloft/ ifjr$: 'below/ ^intt 'virgin/ ^r. 'tree/ fr*
' owl / £ir*: ' a measure 9 . By 'number* grammatical number is meant;
as ^r- 'one/ it 'two/ w. • many*.
The sense of a Pratipadika is to denote mere existence. Genders are
three, masculine, feminine and neuter. Measures are such as drona, kh&ri,
idhaka &c. Numbers are singular, dual and plural. The Nipatas which do
not denote anything are also Pritipadika.
*€**# * 11 & 11 t^ir 11 TOtai5 t * ( mm ) 11
ff^c: 11 *r*to* *r imr Rprf^nt^Rr 11
47. And when the sense is that of addressing,
the first case-affix is employed.
Ex. t m ' O Ram' ? rot , ? cpm 11
/
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
u. V- .j*"--e»»-i * ■»- . > «» — *-*«i~ oM.i*vartc,j
j 296 Vocative case. [ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 48-57.
1
/ :
/ SMCTTOcP^ II %L II V^lfa II TOmf**<F* ( ***ta^
h*pii ) n
48. The word ending with the first case-affix,
in the sense of addressing, is called Amantrita or vocative
1YIIL2.78).
Tt*mi ^35%: 11 »« 11 t^rfa 11 ipai'rc «**%* ,
( w*fera*n*w ) 11
*fa: 11 «n*r foi<ww«n 33*3^4 n^f^f^c^^f *i*Rr 11
49. In the souse of vocative, the singular
number of the first case-affix is called Sambuddhi.
The vocative singular is called sambuddhi, wheo it is employed in the
vocation. Thus VI. 1.69 declares 'after an inflection base ending in
^ or in a short vowel, a consonant is elided if it be that of Sambuddhi '
as $0*11 j
resit «fa II \0 II qc{Tf^ II t?£* , ifa II
f%*rfroS*f*M
50. The sixth case-affix is employed in the
;' remaining cases, that is to say, where there is a sense,
• snch as the relation between property and its owner,
&c. different from that of a word related to a verb
and from that of a Nominal-stem.
|j Ex. CRT: 5^r: 'the king's man' mjt: <n*: 'beast's foot' ft$: ^C:
\ father's son/
ji / ^tif^W *X*t II <fl « *^»f* II «:, s»fa^*J , «^5> ,
51. Of the verb qj jua, when not used in the
senso of c to know, 1 the instrument takes the sixth case-
affix. *
■ : Ex. H&ft sihHI ' he engages in sacrifice with honey'. So also frf^K
3rrrfHt The verb *jt when not meaning ' to know \ has the significance of
ii
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Bk. II. Ch. III. §51-54. ] Genitive case. 207
1 to act, or to engage in;' or it may denote '* false knowledge'; as, ^tfft t^C:
R^St *r . Compare I. 3. 45.
But not so here *ifr* ytf JfRTfir 4 he recognises the son by the voice/
smfa f ( to* ) n
*Rr. 11 M'-itTif.' srrmft: 1 **r TRrTi^r^r^ 1 f V %&** 1 tpntf ^4% *bc**
52. Of the verbs having the sense of c remem-
bering,' (adhlk) and of daj-a l to give/ c to pity * c to
protect/ 'to move,' aiid of i£a c to rule or be master of/ the
object takes the sixth case-affix.
Ex. *rr«J: stviift *he remembers the mother/ srff «Hr^r# lie gives clarified
butter/ ?rrt irnrrmnft? 4 he can not rule his limbs. 9 But not so here «W^ $4: CTCfo
because *r«r here is not the object. The word *fa is also understood here.
So that the cases not otherwise provided for, take this case. So that urcrf
CTTi?r is also allowed.
^to*)«
^Pf : II ^t*r: ttfr <M<*i 0s&* f%*f^T# *fitat «!***&# *# frffrr
H*f?rii
53. The object of the verb kji takes the sixth,
case-affix, when it means c to impart a new quality or
•virtue ' (I. 3. 32).
Ex. ^il**t4)lfc^t<) ' the wood gives a new quality to the water' (or
he prepares the wood and water for sacrifice). (By VI. 1. 139, ^r is inserted).
When stfTOV is not meant, the second case-affix is employed: as *g£
The word $? is also understood here. So that we have also l^T^t
q*3?#ll
^iwwraw • arat f ( vtfa ift to* ) h
*rfH: |l Vinibrf ^i ? l*rf HW^HMl WI44i4<fclUji ^'TtC^fiS^fPff SfftiCJ *CTO?
^tPS^t 11 •raft tffffuftftf* *nii**\ 11
>/*-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
'jj8 Genitive case. [ Bk. 1!. Ch. IIL § 54-56-
54. .The object ot verbs having the seuse ot
ruj c to afflict, 1 with the exception of the Causative verb
jvaraya c to be feverish, 1 takes the sixth case-affix, when
the verb expresses a condition (L e., when the subject is
au Abstract noun).
Ex. ^lw **!«% tt*T- * the disease afflicts the thief *rfc?*Pnrft WW I
Why do we say • when the subject is an Abstract noun? Observe *fft
«HJi;3r W*M ' the river breaks the banks.' So also not here ^t( STCttfr *TC
€ the fever burns the thief/ So also when the verb e*tTT is used, ^ti *tar<nrfir
The word d? is also understood here. Thus *ht *icfi| <f*l: II
iA wA ) ■ .'
t%* fiwftrt *rfr ft*;** 4*f?r 11
55. Of the verb n&th when meaning 'to
bless'; the object takes the sixth case-affix.
Ex. ir^^r *mr% ' he blesses the honey. 1 But WH*yiw r3r , W yfr-
3iP?tar 'he solicits minavaka saying (child) son, study. 9 Here qftr does not
mean to bless, and so it takes the accusative case.
5G. The object of the verbs j&si c to strike';
c to hurt/ han c to strike 1 preceded by fa and sr f n&t to
injure, 1 krath,' and 'pish, 1 when they mean, l to injure 1 ,
takes the sixth case-affix.
*lfil f ft^Rr *T , 'he injures the thief/
The root sr$ belonging to the Churadi class should be taken, and not
Div&di. f^r with the prepositions pra and ni may be taken inany order.
The root n?n takes in the causative vriddhi irregularly. This verb is Bhvidi
and falls into the subdivision ghatidi, and is called there a ft^ verb; all fti£
verbs shorten their penultimate before the causative affix ftj^ (VI. 4. 92).
Thus flV is an irregularity.
Digitized by
Google"
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 56-59. ] GtNlTIVE CASE. 299
Why do we say ' when meaning to injure? Observe tTPff: frrS: * he
pounds the barley. 9
The word ifa is also understood here as <$lr$3iffTOf9r . Only these
govern the genitive, not so here nfa ff^fal , *itt ftfftf II
( *rtSfa TO* ) 1
57. The object of the verbs vyavahji and paiit
when they are synonymous, that is when they mean
4 dealing in sale and purchase transactions 9 -or * staking
in gambling,' takes the sixth case-affix.
Ex. T rereq *mr?ri% or qpril ' he deals in, or stakes hundred. 9
Why does not the verb ^l take the affix •TH[? It takes nrr v/hen mean-
ing 'to praise or honor/ and not in the sense of ' gambling, or bartering * &c.
Not so here ^rsratf s^TfTft % he throws the dice/ itfgrQK* <r*rrc3 'he praises the
Brahmanas/ The word ^? is also here understood, so that we have jpf ^%
1 he stakes a hundred/
58. The object of the verb div when having
the above-mentioned sense of 'dealing' or 'staking,' takes
the sixth case-affix.
Ex. 3JTC3 #5irfir 'he stakes or deals in hundred/ But not in HTtpf
tffs^Rt 'he jokes with the Brahmana/
The yoga vihbAga, when this root might well have been included in
the last aphorism, is for the sake of the succeeding sutras, in which the anuvritti
of f^r runs, and not of others.
firaritq««f 11 \e n q^Tfa h fkmm $ ^n^n f ( f^rei-
^w ^*f*i toV ) n
1&t: 11 *rofr *ft f^Rw^lw *?f Pr *ot* *# fip?fapi*fir 11
59. The object of the verb div when haying
the above-mentioned sense of dealing or staking, option-
ally takes the sixth case-affix, when it is preceded by an.
upasarga (or preposition).
Digitized by VjOOQlC
btfM^-V^' »%«W
800 Genitive case. [ Bk. It. Ch. III. § 59-62.
Ex. ^f^r jpt . WT 11*% #*Wi% ' he deals in or stakes a hundred. 1
But no option is allowed when the verb is simple as in the last aphorism ; nor
does this rule apply when the sense is not that of dealing or gambling. As,
VH » *I srf% f)«*f*r 'he throws the missile. 9
^i^i **if*t ) »
^fa: 11 yrcrofrr* **nfr fowrfor wiPi «ktc* fr<ft«r Rr*rf%r4^Rr 11
60. The object of the verb div when having
the above-mentioned sense of c dealing* or ' staking *
takes the second case-affix in the Brahmana literature.
Ex. iTPTC* *lf V S*CT*f ffwfcj: (Maitr. S. i. 6. 1 1 ) In the Vedic literature
the simple verb div takes the accusative instead of the genitive. And with
upasarga it is optional. The anuvptti of the word {ft docs not extend to this
sfitra, or the following.
ita39t£ fo?t^r?rresf^ it $1 n ^ife n ita-3r tit: 9
Jf*i: 11 ftc*3$r* fir*: *W. «rar fir*farf*flr frm *w^pr 11
61. The object of the verb preshya and brfthi
(imperative singular of Div&di verb, meaning c send ' and
€ utter,') denoting sacrificial food, takes the sixth case-
affix, when making offerings to deity is meant or when
deity is the recepient.
Ex. nm$t 5PT?* *Rr$faTPTT ^tt*J|ff 5«* *r ' send to fire as oblation,
the goat, the fat, and the marrow.' But not here:— *m* S[r»f f I*flt Sflr *J ffa :
Because the verb is not preshya or bruhi. So also not here anrt 4lM*H^ $*m .
Because it is not an oblation. Not here too HlUJi<tim ifirTOt $«* . Because
the recepient is not a diety. Compare VI II. 2. 91.
Varti — This rule does not apply when the word iffepr ' set out 9
qualifies the wordffcas; f^CfR^^Oi^f (ftltffo «?falrf &nr' 'send to Indra
and Agni the oblation set out for them' &c.
^?(% ( ^tfk ) n
1 Rr. ii c?f ^ fire* ^i^u stft firaftrisfir wpt\ 11
*iffa^ i f toto vtyft q*t>*g f 11
**-*
/
.,■■■■ ■ ! ■■ P"
Digitized by LjOOQ IC
\
[ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 62-64. Case-affixes. 801
62. In the chhandas the sixth case-affix is
employed diversely with the force of the fourth case*
affix.
Ex. TCT'T'PraPre : or VJpNI ' to the moon, a male deer. 9 iflwr «Un**iT
fnf TO^fr ^ g pfhn^ or TTOftTO ' to you lords of the forest, are lizard,
k&laka bird, &c. So also *njrVTT ^m T*T^ (R. Ved. X. 136. 7),
Why do we say ' diversely 7 Observe ff*«*lnWfr , ftsroft f^fr .
Vart\ — In the Veda, the 4th case-affix is employed in the sense of the ,
sixth: as nt i$v* frrRr *TC$ *i?ffarnnJ 'who soever woman drinks with a woman I k € ^J .
in her courses, gets herself in menstrua. So also «fr?^)r >Trarf*f itx$ T*RH% 'who jlj
cleans her teeth, her teeth become black/ fffTCrrft ff^fRr *TC^ sgTO: 'who pairs *J *J^>
her nails, her nails become ugly.' So on, in qrl sreiftre^ Wr: nrj un^ita^ juJ^ °~
J^wfr , IT ^STP£Hfw*Sfill *TC$ IS&fif II BTfF^ri SfTC: (T. S. 2. 5. I. 7). fa*^^
^5hSf W& N ^ tl^lf* II H%: 9 *, fBKvt $ ( mil ) 11 L ^£x
^Rt: 11 **hifcft: *r* *it* s^fRr w$# *# fcrftrf*ft 11 ^tM^ %
63. The sixth case-affix is diversely employ- Jb***H
ed in the chhandas in denoting the instrument of the
verb yaj c to sacrifice.'
Ex. tpiw or ^frr^itf 'he sacrifices with butter.' cfta* or sWr VW II
*n§ 9 sifa^r ( xnft ) n
64. The sixth case-affix is employed in denot-
ing location (adhikarai.ia) after a word denoting time
(k&la) A when used along with a word ending with an
affix having the sense of kritvasuch (V. 4. 17) l so many
times/
Ex. <fafE*Mgt>pfc 'he eats five times a day.' In short, 'words
meaning so many times, or the numeral adverbs of frequency, govern the
genitive of time in the sense of locative.' As ftCafirWW ' he studies twice in
a day. 9
Why do we say 'having the force of f^rsf^?' Observe •?% iW
' he sleeps in the day/
This rule will not apply when the adverb of frequency is understood,
not expressed (prayoga) as in s^Rr *pi>^. Nor when the time is not meant,
as ft: nJtqi M Nq t Jpfc ' he eats in two brass vessels.' So also when location is
\
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
302 Genitive case. Bit 1L Ch. Ill § 64-66. ]
not meant: as fixft JJ*fr . The xfar being understood we nave ftlf^tftt .
( ** > ■
65. The sixth case affix is employed after a
word, in denoting the agent and the object, when used
along with a word ending with a kpit affix (III. 1. 93).
Ex. fifc*t SFTfoTTO^ 'the composition of Kalid&sa/ Mlf^T S*w*rt 'the per*
former of sacrifice/ So also **w ^rtfnRT 'your turn of lying down/ *rof irer ,
jet HW TOW *nft • But not in ^^"MMf 'cutting with weapon/
Why do we say 'kpt?* Not so when a Taddhita-affix is employed as
g > *m*I^i . In other words, the genitive in Sanskrit is both subjective and
objective.
* *tfft 11
*rf%3P{ 11 »mmiii4i: eft *r**nnifc ir^nfr #ft «ns^i^ 11
i *tf%qpj 11 W fip*nr 11
66. When the agent and the object of the ac-
\ tion denoted by the words formed by krit-affixes, are both
4 used in a sentence, in the object only, the sixth case-affix
is employed, and not in the agent (the object is put in
the genitive case and not the agent).
WS^? *prf ftSf*lWlH*T 'the milking of a cow without a cowherd is a
; wonder/ ?ftt$ HftWl Hi*P# ?***kr 'The eating of rice by Devadatta
pleases me;' <rara: <TPf *Rl^r ' the drinking of milk by Yajfiadatta/
I Varti — ' When the agent and object are both used, the agent is put
' ! in the instrumental, or genitive case, when, as some say, the kfit termina-
1 tions are of the feminine gender, or as others say, when the terminations are
of any gender; as, f%Prrr W: frf%$Cf fan' WT 'the creation of the world by
Hari is wonderful/ imHIH^i^H^^I^OT MT^nSw *r 'the dissertation on words
by the AchArya' frfa^Tff ^W frflr: <frfi&3: or qifinfror 'beautiful is the struc-
ture of sutra by Panini/ Apte.
, «*i % *$mh 11 ^» 11 ^if^r n *r*t, % *thni| ( vdl ) ■
*jfif: II ^fk^r WHH«til«Pift<W| H$t9 l€t f%HpfpJffif II
1
t
\
"Digitize J by VjOO^LC
t
in
it
[ Bk. II. Ch HI. § 67.69. Case-affix. SOS
*r£npr 11 *rjs* *nrr<rcta*ppi n
m&3 » t 11 xhrSGcnr^ fa^nj 11
67. The past participle ending in ^5 when
used in the sense of the present tense, (III. 2. 187 and
188) is used with the genitive.
Ex. ostffjfw 'honored by kings/ ftif^CTQt Hftlft'- 'I alone am re-
garded by the king/
Why do we say 'w '? Observe *?fatf T^TFf: ' rice is cooked. 1 Why do
we say 'when denoting the present tense f ? Observe qpf *Pf: 'gone to the
village/
Vart: — When used as abstract neuter nouns, past participles are
used with the genitive, as T^rcw *J*t 'the dancing of a peacock. 9 S(R** fftra
'the laughing of the students/ ^Tifovttii cqrrjfl^'the screaming of the cuckoo. 9
When, however, agent is desired to be particularised, the instrumental case is'
employed: asgi^l f^PPJ .
This sfitra debars sfitra 69 by which genitive is prohibited after
Nishtha affixes. This is an exception to that sfitra.
(**& ) n
68. The past participle in ^5 is used with
the genitive when the former expresses location (III. 4.
76).
This also is an exception to the prohibition about Nishjha contained in
II. 3. 69. As ^H ' HIHifafl^ 'this is their seat/ frftf Jjfqtf 'this is their sleeping/
In connection with verbs taking two objects, both take the genitive
case, when a word ending in k fit-affix denotes the agent, as they would have
taken the accusative: as, #rftJvltq *TWF* ^T. * Chaitra is the leader of the horse
of the village/ When, however, one is the principal, then the object lakes
the genitive: as, #?TrfSTOJ IT* ^P 1 ' Chaitra leads the horse to the village. 9
^5ER.f^T.nrs^.^pn^ f ( ^ ) n
qrrr5*Fj 11 *** srf?ra$ ^rofrroqqftW 11
mf&htii BTRhmftW **^^r*fa*r. 11
qrrf^fepl 11 ft*: vQtt **&% 11
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
~ fi t^c i3LK > ?Taazs ' ' " * Vjt*-j==r-!
V I
304 Case-affixes.
[ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 69, 70.
G9. The sixth case-affix is not used to ex-
press the agent or the object, when the word is govern-
ed by an Active Participle ending in the affix «* , or t ,
or ^ f or by an Indeclinable, or by a Past Participle in
^ and ^7^3, or by a word ending in an affix having the
sense of ^ra or by a 25oim of agency formed by ^p^ R
After these words, the Instrumental case must be employed to denote
the Agent, and the Accusative case to denote the object. This sutra debars
Genitive which would have come by II. 3. 65. The word sfifai is formed by
51 + ST + &X = 51 + 3^& ss 5?|W .
1. The word is means f % the substitutes of ?5 u *., the Present Parti-
ciples in $py , STPT^ (HI. 2. 124), ch l H^ (III. 2. 106) 1*3 (III. 2. 107) fti and
fe^ (III. 2. 1 72). Thus *?j^r <rz% , t^tpt, ^nr or ^^rfpr , <rfa *?p*\ , *f**if: 11
2. The affix ? is enjoined by III. 2. 168, as, 3ET ft3fr§: , Ht?«f **pj: II
The prohibition applies when a word ending in ^OTP^ (HI. 2. 136) is the
governing term ; as, ^^Hri^Fft^j: II
3. The affix ^FT is ordained by III. 2. 1 04: as STPTPpg ^TCTTOf r^T MOT: II-
Vart : — But the word 4*1331 in secular Sanskrit, governs the Genitive,
as {TOOT: ^iTJ^r: ' lusting for tlie slave.'
4. Indeclinables formed by ^ affixes, as, grf f»?*r , ^Ppi y*T II
Far/; — This prohibition, however, does not apply to the indeclin-
ables formed by %sj^ (III. 4. 16) and ^ (III. 4. 17), as, <jn ^EgifeilrHftnhr: ,
Sn sg^sj (rorir firctffrr (1. 1. 40).
5. Nishtha /. e., *F and ^r^ ; as srir^ $+MI^ frt<j^*f ?^ •
6. The words formed by ^r5U affixes (III. 3. 126), as, {<T<£3iTir *I73f
7. The ^^ in the aphorism is a pratyahara, formed by taking the
gr of 5fir (III. 2. 129) and the final \ of <TT (III. 2. 135), meaning the affixes
jjfH\ (HI. 2. 128), ^P^r (in. 2. 129), ^ (III. 2. 130) and ^ (III. 2. 135).
As ScW 1<WM: , •HHIvMV , STO^F* , <MI4UJ^ , *&& ttl* , ^T^T *WJ43HM K I
Yart: — Optionally so, when the root ft^ takes the affix sry , as, ^ftr
or "Ita* ftq*r 11
Mfa^-sn^wto: ( *vil ) 11
satf Kit f%»r^ **fa 11
wgfirewby
Google
Bk. II. Ch. III. § 70-72. ] Case-affixes. 305
70. The sixth case-affix is not used when the
word is governed by a verbal noun in zr* denoting
fUtuiity, or in ^ denoting c futurity and indebtedness.*
The affix *ror , such as jijfi , ^pr &c, denote futurity, and never
denote indebtedness. The affix %\ such as fafar (III. 3. 3 and 170) denotes
both. Thus Wii ^li^Tl ?nrf*r ' he goes to make a mat 9 ftftf* HhnS> IHfSr ' he
goes to eat rice.' So also with f^, as, qnc *P& or ijpfr * he has to go to the .
village. 9 jjg qrft * he owes hundred. 9
Why do we say • when denoting futurity or indebtedness 9 ? Observe
^TfPff ftPPK: * the cutter of barley* 9 B^i qnnj: , H*j^r *rft **Ff II
Why is the Genitive employed in the following ri^nrcr ^jC*fc , yifl*H« tf"
{&&? The words ^c*i and $*htf , though formed by ir*f (III. 1. 133), are not
formed by that mff which denotes futurity, vis., III. 3. 10. The present
sutra relates to this latter H€ , and not every «rar in general.
(to*) 11
^jirt*^ 11 wnrfar ^A to*t nfiivft «ww 11
71. The sixth case-aifix is optionally employ-
ed in denotiug the agent, (bnt not the object)} when the
word is governed by a Future Passive Participle (kpitya).
By II. 3. 65, verbal nouns, (krit-formed), always govern the Genitive
in denoting agent or object The present sfitra declares an option as to
agents only, in the case of those verbal nouns which are Future Passive
Participles. Thus HTO or **m *& srifer. (HI. 1. 95).
Why do we say ' in denoting the agent 9 ? In denoting the object,
no option is allowed ; the Genitive is compulsory. As ipft IftRTCft 9T8P{ II
Varti — The prohibition of the Genitive should be stated in the case
of the Future Passive Participles of those verbs which govern two objects.
Thus v&v&n i?r? srrar $ *t^ff , ^*i*4rf trppnir $44^*! 11
^fi*:.« qe*n3: «?Hrrt arfNr f%*firih wg<iu*t , w *# 1 , tRftmr
72. The third, or the sixth ease-affix may
optionally be employed, when the word is joined with
another word meaning * like to, or resemblance '; except-
ing «J5*T.and &m> .
Digitized by
Google
306 Case-affixes. [ Bk. II. Ch. III. § 72,73.
Thus t[Nt $***r or ?*?«**> «ftf* **f*r or hfTCT » But with
*fc*r and 3TO the Genitive must necessarily be employed. As fpr IfajMW
Though the anuvfitti of <ir was understood in this sfltra from the previous
sfitra, yet the repitition of sfWHltmi is for the sake of the subsequent sfltra.
The word ^ in II. 3. 73 attracts the word *i-4<K*q!t, into that sfltra ; but had
the word *{~4tH*4UJ^ not been used in this sfltra, then the word ^ would
have attracted the word drtNu instead, which is not desired.
On this sfltra, Professor Apte say*: — 'PAnini says that the words *pjr
and 3TOT can not be used with . the Instrumental. But this is against good
usage: as, ?jj*rf ^lO^fa W^nererr (Kum. Sam. V. 24), H*m ^<tf tiHIfcity (Raghu-
varfisa VIII. 15). FjSfa* *jfil3R»* *pprr (MAgh L 4)/
1 wff sn fa mu^um 3 ** gf3Tgg*gi$ffft: n v\ ii v^tik 11
RaiftJKrflr 1 ^rarcir ft^ni ^ ; 11
vM^ 11 awnj^nfM | niH<i? , f ^ra**P£ 11
73. The fourth as well as the sixth case-
affix may he employed, when blessing* is iatended in con-
nection with, the words 4yusha 'long life,' madra c joy,'
bhadra c good fortune,' kuSala c welfare.' sukha ' happi-
ness,' artha ' prosperity/ and hita ' good.'
; The ^ in the sfltra makes the employment of Dative optional : in the*
lj alternative we have Genitive.
! Varti — In this sfitra 3*P[«r &c, include their synonyms also.
( ! Thus «n^f ^f^rnr ^Jjn^ or W^J |??TOr h^\ ll Similarly flu?
j. • sfti%*f, Hi 1 Hi, 3TO5?,firnra,s[^, xf, *t*ft,ir$t*Fi , fftf Tv?*S*rTW*Tor^r*TC*
L ijjn^ii
Why do we say when 'benediction is intended? Observe an^nr
! %Sf^re* *TT: ' the austerity is the cause of the long life of Devadatta.' Here
I there is no option allowed: and the Genitive case is only employed.
1
Digitized by
Gongtr
BOOK II.
Chapter IV.
> op<x —
f5g*«*nre* a 9 vmpfk ii {53: i ij*-*^r\a
^Rfc II fi^f ^TO: IFIPPW *WfiMI
1. The compound Dvigu (II. 1. 52) is singular
in number.
The word q^llH is a genitive Tat-purusha compound meaning * the
expression for one/ that is to say, it expresses the sense of unity. The rule
therefore, enjoins that the sense inherent in a Dvigu compound is that of
unity.
This is confined to Samahara Dvigu t. e n an aggregate compound
taken in a collective sense. As, T^rrf € an aggregate of five cows, 9 M^ffcft
(IV. 1. 2i.)- The sense of Dvigu being that of one, it follows that it retains
the singular number even when further modified by other affixes, and used
as an attributive and though no longer a Dvigu ; as, q^jrftaf ffrf *r H
5*53 infiifr4% HiftMH^ a 3 a *ufo ■ TO* , % mf*r-
2. A Dvandva compound too is singular in
number, when it is compounded of words signifying mem-
bers of the animal body, players (or singers or dancers)
and component parts of an army.
As/nf*rn*n/ the hand and foot ' fijtn&i * the head and neck ' IT* f^pC-
vnoft^Pf * players on the mpdaflga and panava (kinds of drums) 9 <ftj4tll4i)f1
'the soldiers on chariot and horse/ ffl^n^ff yrforffy^, ifiHWjW^ II
This rule applies to cases of Samah&ra Dvandva or aggregate
Dvandva Compounds only; and not to Itaretara Dvandva (II. 2. 29.)
j
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
808 Dvandva Compound. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 2-3.
In the Dvandva Compounds of animals such as elephants, horses &c,
the singular is optional; (II. 4. 12.) The present rule also gives us an index
as to where we must make Sam&hira Dvandva and where an Itaretara
Dvandva. The Dvandva compounds of words signifying members of animal
body, players or army, sire always and solely Sam&hira Dvandva. The
compounds of words like fflfrT^t' 'curd and milk 1 (II. 4.14.) are purely
Itaretara Dvandva and can never be Sam&h&ra Dvandva ; while compounds
of words denoting tree, animals &c, (II. 4. 12.) are optionally either Sam&h&ra
or Itaretara Dvandva*
(3P5 : , 1«^)
3. A Dvandva compound of words signifying
' persons belonging to the different Vedic-Schools when
the sense is that of repetition, is singular.
The word ^OJT means a school or branch of any of the Vedas de~
signated by the name of the person who founded such a branch and hence
means such a person. The word BT^f? means repetition by way of explana-
tion! illustration or corroboration ; that is to say! when a speaker demonstrates
for some special purposes, a proposition which had already been demonstrated
before, that is called anuvida.
This aggregate is used with the aorist of the roots *ifl" and ^ only ; as
Sfnrnr <hg^hMn^ 'ka^ha and k&l&pa arose (again, further demonstrating their
doctrines)'; q^TORT SR*^tjT^ € kajha and kauthuma established again/
Why do we say 'when meaning repetition '? Observe 3*5: qi**Mmf :
or s^Tf : Q&&iXHI: 9 when demonstration for the first time is meant. It is the
aorist of *ifr and f* which takes such a Dvandva and not any other verb or
any other tense of these verbs; as: — M*rfo^ MisthMiir: and 3Praf*<t 44id4ilt4Wf:.
Note: — This sfitra is translated thus by Mr. Iyangar, • Aggregation
alone is admissible between words denoting peisons belonging to the differ-
ent charanas of the Vedas, when they are used along with the aorist derived
from the roots sthA and id, in the sense of recitation of the charanas as al-
ready learnt, as distinguished from learning them the first time/ Prof.
Bohthlingk's translation is, ' The Dvandva Compound of the names of Vedic-
Schools is singular, when such a school is repeatedly mentioned equally along
with another.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
£gh- r ^'
Bk. II. Ch. IV. $ 4-6. ] Dvandva Compound. 809
4. A Dvandva compoud of words denoting
sacrifices (kratu) ordained by the Yajur (Adhvaiyu) Veda,
is singular, provided they are never used iu the neuter
gender.
As, aroftc^i?^ 'the Arka and Agvamedha sacrifices/ orrarfTf^TOPf
'the Sayahna and Atiratra sacrifices. 9
Why do we say ' Yajur-veda sacrifices ? Observe *^rsft 'the Ishu and
Vajra ceremonies/ 3^ft?3«rf*Ift II
Why do we say 'when not in the neuter gender? Observe <l*i«*HI*ui*u
'the Rajasfiya and Vajapeya sacrifices. 9
Why have we q jqh j} qnJV ? Because the word njy is a technical
term applying only to Soma-sacrifices and not any sacrifices in general.
Therefore, though Darsa and Paiirnamasa are Yajur-veda ceremonies, tbey
not being Soma ceremonies, the present rule does not apply.
srai^ratifirn^esr^qnn^M h « wpfV» warn*: , erf*
ircvsreiFnw , (5*5, q4numw )
5. A Dvandva compound of words denoting
(persons who have studied) subjects, which in their order
of study are not remote from each other, is singular.
As, <t?3i4|CT3i<i ' a person who has studied the pada arrangement
and a person who has studied the krama arrangement ; so also ^raPjrf^^^.
Why do we say ' order of study '? Observe : .fq?rr<r*ft * father and
son/ W£hy do we say ' not remote ? See *rri <H>3qi*hiuft ' sacrifice-knower
and the grammarian/
( 5*5, T»w ) «
\Mi ii srrfforf^tf sr^ptf w?x tjsronfa , wftrft mffimi ii
6. A Dvandva compound of words signify,
ing j&ti (genus) which are not names of liviug beings, ia
singular.
Digitized by VjOOQlC
S10 Dvandva Compound. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. $ 6, f>
Thus UKUjfc* 'the probe and the knife'; *fM(U<l«f*l f fried rice and
barley cake. 9
Whj do we saj 'words denoting genus 7 Observe *r?^qrg^nft
' Nandaka and Pinchajanya/
Why do we say ' not of living being? See UTSmmf'Pql' " BrAhmanas
and the Kshatriyas/
This rule applies to the jiti or genus names of substances ( ftm^ufii )
and not the jiti names of qualities and actions. (*p3jfer*inrrf>r), Thus ^rt9~
iFH^mf: * colour, savour, odour, and tangibility *; WHI^VH&UIHUJlft ' going,
contraction and expansion/
Even with jiti names of substances, the Dvandva compound takes
singular, only when the objects are spoken of collectively as a dass ; when,
however, the individuals belonging to a class are indicated, the proper number
should be employed ; as, %f *g& q^im^-jijfr HiaPd 'in this bowl are the
badari and Amalaki fruits/
The words Stffa 'genus/ *s* 'substance/ iprr • quality 9 and ftrer
'action 9 are technical terms of Indian Logicians. JAti has already been ex-
plained. Substances are nine: earth, water, light, air, ether, time, space/
soul, and mind. Qualities are twenty-four: colour, savour, odour, tangibility,
number, dimension, severalty, conjunction, disjunction, priority, posteriori-
ty, weight, fluidity, viscidity, sound, understanding, pleasure, pain, desire,
aversion, effort, merit, demerit and faculty. There are five actions; throwing
upwards, throwing downwards, contraction, expansion and going.
wrPfei^ii wnnr %wh jhhuuI RftrWf **e**: ii
*iPJ«^u ^ra*rv*nHr*tf *tf^ft ^k«^: ii
7. A Dvandva compound of words of different
genders, denoting names of rivers and countries, but not
of towns, is singular.
Thus «f*TTrjft*Pl # the Ganges and the Sona.' STT*: + JgtlM « yffi l i N
1 the country of the Kurus and the Kurukshetra/ 9*vfcr?*ft 4*4 5i 4 HT^p^| II
Why do we say • of different genders ? Observe ihrRH# 'the Ganges
and the Ylmuna/ Both being feminine gender, so also Tg3t3TO: II..
"bTg'iti^d'by'GuO^k
Bk. IL Ch. IV. § ;.g. ] : Dvandva Compound 811
: Why do we say • rivers and countries? Observe <y^**«^t - the hen
.and the pea-hen/
Why do we say ' not of a town? See HIH4*JI<lpli»4t , J4mbaba and
Silukinf ' which are the names of two villages or griina.
We have taken the word « river/ as the word 'country* does not in-
elude • river.' So also • mountains ' are not included ; as £«?lll*l* v JJil{*t * the
Kailisa and the Gandham&dana/
Vart\ — The prohibition extends to villages and towns (grAraa) but not
to cities, (Nagara), as »ru;*rn?fB5pf ' the cities of Mathura and Pitaliputra/
Vart: — When a compound consists of two words, one a town and
the other a city, the prohibition applies ; as *th&K<rc*t ' the city of Saurya and
the village of Ketavata/
«3*rai«* n * ll ti^t{5| ii «r;-wcra: f ( 5*5 if^^^w ) I
^f%: 11 iprsFj irftrt «fs q^rrrRi 11
8. A Dvandva compound of words signify-
ing small animals, is singular.
Thus TOTfirer^ 'the louse and the nil'; *J[PTO^ 'the bug and the JT
mosquito. 9 The word ffi C <fgt T means an animal of a very small size. Some
say that animals not having bones are called ^?3T^J , (invertebrates; ; others
say, those which are small in size ; others say, all below the mongoose are
kshudrajantu.
vnpftv: ( 5*5:, ^wo ) 1
9. A Dvandva compound of words signifying
those animals only among whom there is permanent
enmity i. e-, natural and eternal antipathy or quarrel, is
singular. ,
The word f%*t>* means enmity: and tTPjffcr: means permanent. ^/
Thus, «rrafc>grap| * the cat and the rat'; j^TCpn^ ' the dog and tbe W
jackal '; M ft^FT^t f tfie snake and the mongoose. 9 ^
Why do we say * natural and eternal 7 Observe J|tolfcjU«l%J4MI.
SK5TfTO?* ' Gaupili and SAlank&yana are quarrelling/
The force of the word *t in the aphorism is that of qr 4 only/ Dvandva *
compounds of such animals only are invariably singular ; no other rule, even
byV: OO
SIX Bk. II. Ch IV. §9-11. ] Dvandva Compound.
if otherwise applicable, would apply to such compounds. Thus rule 12 says
that Dvandva compounds of beasts and birds, is optionally singular . That
rule (by I. 4, 2.) would have set aside the present rule. But ^T prevents that,
and no optional plural number is allowed in case of beasts or birds that are
naturally at war; as H^rf^^. ' the horse and the buffalo '; ^l^tlo^l ' the crow
and the owl/
ftcf^w, ( 3*5*, n**o ) ■
^fii: 11 nf^^iOT^jptrfaff tr€$prf 55^ ir^Pnrvft 11
; 10. A Dvandva compound of words denoting
those classes of Sftdras who have not been expelled from
the communion of higher classes, is singular.
Thus, <ltfiq*<hC^ ' the carpenter and the blacksmith '; m^qumq^
• the washerman and the weaver.'
• The word Hftrfflrtf means one not expelled (from the dish).
A Sfidra who can take food from the dish of a higher class, without
permanently defiling that vessel, is called an AnirvAsita Sfidra •
Why do we say ' not expelled'* Observe Vil^flll: • the Chandila
and the Mritapa.'
i^raau^cftBf nun vyik u i^ns-xwftf^ , ( 15*-
11. The word gav&Sva, and others are also
' Dvandva compounds which take the singular number.
} Thus «nrnc*^ ' the cow and the horse/ So also Jlilft*^ .
t. TflC** • 2. TSTfa'SE'J . 3. *t^ctpj. 4» HsrrSw^. 5- w-
; qr^. 6. qrerem ^ . 7. sraFr^rnranj. 8. ypfhpr . 9. rnrnrra^. 10.
• stawrc^. 11. tftftansnwi. 12. jrjrfHW^. 13. ^^jari- 14- 3*?3T-
| • ' xr*. 15. yqy r . 16. «jrjftw. 17. *i3rte. l8 « ffatftf'ra^- 19.
5 ^j^- 20. ^nft 1 ^. 21. MSFrfarctan. 22. d^ltviu . 23. frcitarer\.
24. sj^t^r . 25. qiHRfrfrnrc^ . v
Varti — In this list, the forms as given, are singular ; but when the
same words assume different forms they may take either .number. As
«ffcFPJ or iftT^ • In this form of «TT and wj the next rule applies and option
is allowed.
1
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Dvandya Compound. Ek. II. Ch. IV. { 12, 13. ] 313
film*? ^«M J l^^Ml^W^M|t^^lSil<i«^ilM<IM<t ^
*n»n^i H ■ v^fk ■ fawn, ^^r-vi-ispi-^iT^i-^Erg^f-ti^-^j^fn-
jfir: 11 fw yt to *n** «^5pr *g jor^ft ir<ww «gr/ir •wf^rc iwit
qrPfaPE 11 *yq»fo qnsfrrr * wf«yi^ft^ft*i«*qi»W'iHi'i 11
12. A Dvaudva compouud of words being
the names of trees, wild animals, grass, corn, condiment,
domesticbeasts and birds, and the compounds a&va-va<Java,
purv£-para and adharottara, are optionally singular.
1 2 Thus. OTTOifcPl or HM^Mi^T: ' the Plaksha and the Nyagrodha trees';
ttyitHl or »mmi|: • the Rum-deer and the spotted antelopes 9 ; *JJ*HJ*l or
*im*H|i: ' the Ku$a grass and the Kasa grass '; fflf^Tf or ffriTOp: ' the rice
and the barley * ffttnr^or ft ' the curd and the butter ' nfrff^orqr: 'the
cow and the buflalo'; flrfxTftqtffrffia^ or w: 'the Tittiri (a kind of part-
ridge) and the Kapinjala birds 9 ; «?^fn^ or *r: ' the horse and the mare 9 ;
^jfaoj or ? € the first and the last '; awTt^C^ or ^ • the upper and lower/
Varfc — The Dvandva compound of words denoting names of fruits,
army, large trees, wild animals, birds, small animals, grain and grass,
is singular, when a large number or quantity of these is spoken of ; that is when
a large number of them is taken collectively, the compound is singular,
otherwise not ; as, 4411191$ ftTO: ' a badari and an amalaki fruit are here 9 ;
lfM4il*JHttV 'a charioteer and a horseman '; ?pff?«Piirw ' a Plaksha and a
Nyagrodha tree '; STI^ l a Ruru and a Prishata deer f ; j(h^ *qi*} • a Hansa
and a Chakravaka bird '; ^3Hftrf 'a louse and a nit 9 ; tftff^Pfk 'a brthi and
yava grain '; JK^uft • the kusa and ka*a grass.
^fifrii firafiifirsnifcrt ^Hiwft^iujqiPpiiwqqiPi^t to Ti^ift
firarorprfcjpf n^rc: 11
13. A Dvandva compound of words of con-
trary significations, but not being the names of con-
crete substances, is optionally singular.
Thus tfhfl^mor tftf)pc% ' cold and heat 9 ; $^g.l£ or OT^tat • pleasure
and pain 9 ; sftftfWnrf or *lft*w3 « life and death. 9
- The word faiffafa^ means words of contrary significations. *( indicates
the anuvptti of the word 'optionally ' from the last sfitra.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
I
r
M«
SU Dvandva Compound. £Bk. II. Ch: IV. $'13.16.
Why do we $*y c of contrary significations 7 Observe, OiPn£h?t 'lust
and anger/ which are not of contrary significations.
Why do we say 'not being the names of substances 9 ? Observe
tfflfcd 3?9i ' cold and warm waters/ which denote substances.
( 50110 ) R
14. The Dvandva compounds like 'dadhipaya*
f j! &a, arc not singular.
Ill Thus *fa<Rreft 'the curd and the milk'; rfffaift onmrfHt «the
« ;j clarified butter and the honey/
I With this sfttra begins prohibition of singular number which previous
j sAtras would have caused.
i. The following is a list of such compounds:—
j f ; 1 *. $farosfr . 2, ^rf^^V or *r^gf<f ^t . 3. fnwrrrt! . 4. Rnr*
■{J $wft. 5- **K*ff%Wfr< 6. <rRHra^fsNfr . 7- wflfrqft • 8* ^S^sft.
/IS 9. furorl* 11 ftmtMift*? : 11 10. <M*H*ft . ii. M^jsmfT .. ia, St^Rro^ .
1' 13. n ui<H<w<ft . 14- wgsOTs^. 15. Bironm*. 16. v^r^- 17.
^*vHI*> . 18. otfto3.
«Bif.t^?rrac% * 11 ^h 11 w^ n «iBMPW«^iif-
*** * t ( n 5* v ) «
^[Rd 11 «Tf^t°J *jP$<r*riJ :, fr f^ ^nrrawnJ^Mro wtaw.T^ <tRhi u 1u«wi3
«rd &CT**fir ti
I 15. A Dvandva compound deuoting afjxed
number (etavatya) of <?o?ierete things (adhikara\ia) is not
singular. Cr^r^X frtr^^ <Sy ^
As, f^r ^t5T:. * ten Bets, of te.eth fiind tfps f $ TOHrfQ[ ^HfiHM: ' ten
sets of drum and panavika players. Compare II. 4. 2.
w* , 3P5* Tw» ) h v /
16. A Dvandva; cqnipomid, denoting $n apt*
proximate number of concrete substances* ia optionally
singular.
"Digitized ~by VJ OOQ IC
Bk. 11 Cm. IV. $ 16-18. ] Samasas. 315
As, ;T<?W f?ntf or ^TfXTT frtWn ' nearly ten i. *., nine or eleven sets
of teeth and lips '; vrftf qrf Qpwngft** or TTJtfT «ff? fy*qrtf%*i: 'nearly ten
(nine or eleven) mtfdaAga and panava players. 9
An indeclinable, when compounded with a numeral, may either be a
Bahuvrthi or an AvyaylbhAva compound. When the compound is singular
in form, it is Avyayibhiva, and when it takes proper number-terminations,
it is Bahuviihi compound. As, vrof ; VfTOT: (U. 2. 25).
jf*: II «l*HI«frM*lft ft^f: H^^ t ifa^ 5(Tr7f fi^[**CT H
vf^^n iraitRtiw rrit fi^p feret *i**t 11
^iPNi^ 11 *r Jlro: ftnrcfts: 11
*rW«H 11 *r*rfr^ irfW4t *****: 11
17. It, namely the Dvigu or the Dvandva
coinpouud, with regard to which singular number has
been ordained by the above rules, is always a neuter
gender.
As, TCPTFl 'an aggregate of ten cows/ qrft<n*^ 'hands and feet.'
fircfaft*^ 'head and neck/
This sutra debars the operation of the rule by which a compound
gets the gender of its subsequent member. See II. 4. 26.
Vart: — A Dvigu, the last member of which ends in short if, is employ-
ed in the feminine gender only ; as 4«y<^vft , fXITOfr •
Vart: — A Dvigu, the last member of which is a feminine word end-^
ing in W£ affix, is optionally feminine ; as, q^tg*«£or 'T^jqft .
Vart: — A Dvigu, the last member of which is a word ending in tf^ f
is optionally feminine and the *t is elided ; as, q ^jw * or H^q\ft ,
Vart: — Prohibition must be stated in the case of Dvigu compounds
ending in qr^ &c., cn^n^; ^|^; Prj^T^. , '
sw*ftwrei 11 & n ^inr 11 «wift row: , w , ( ww-
w«w ) 11
fj%: 11 M**nftarrv ^nir *rt*n*ri*#r *ifa 11
*rftf *^ 11 3**gfSwrpqr: fftrft** 11
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
/*^«
816 Samasas. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. $ 18-20.
18. An Avyaytbh&va (II. 1. 6.) compound is
also neuter gender.
Thus, Hfafar ' pertaining to a woman '; so also, CTCTffft, d«wftl^ &c.
But for this rule, an AvyayibhAva compound would have been either
without any gender, if gender were to be regulated by its first member, which
is generally an indeclinable, and which is the principal member in the com-
pound ; or it would have taken the gender of its subsequent member, like
Other compounds in which the last member is principal.
The force of ^ is to include cases not mentioned already.
Vart: — Neuter gender is employed after the word *qf preceded by
«pr* or Hffsr ; as JTnjTTJ 4 sacred day '; ^ff^rff^ ' lucky day/
Vart: — The word w is neuter when compounded with a numeral or
an Avyaya ; as ftro^ , •nfftWJ , fWFJ» *$F*\ •
,^ Far/:— Adverbs, qualifying verbs, are put in the neuter gender\and
K $y . accusative case/; as *j TOfif ' he cooks mildly/ jfttrf <r*fi| ' he cooks well/
(19. A Tat-purusha compou nd, with the excep-
tion of that which is formed by the particle nafi, and
) of the Karrnadh&raya compound, becomes neuter gender,
! in the cases explained in the following sfttras.
1 This is a governing sfltra and regulates the sense of the succeeding
aphorisms which show when a Tat-purusha may be neuter. Thus, mumfln*
or. iff (II. 4« 25); but {i&ft nm (the compound not being Tat-purusha); ircfrff
J (it bting a compound with in^=if) ; and <ttoNt (it being Karmadharaya.
j j ra*ri *c*4t*ft^g 11 Ro n q^tfi* 11 ottoto f «*m t
j «*ita*g , ( wgw ^** ) ■•
20. When denoting an appellative, a Tat-
, t purusha compound ending with the v word kanthft
4 town/ is neuter in gender, provided that it is the name
J of a town situated in the country of the U£lnaras..
,i|
ili
V
T5i ^ i?ze ' , d l by , G00^1g '
Bit It. Ch. IV.} 20-21. ] Samasas. 317
1 - - -»
As, frktTi%4i?*^[ 'the towQ of Sau£ami'; mgqK^T^ 'the town of
Ahwara.'
When not an appellative! the form is different; as, 4UllJ4fi~iU . So
also if the town is not in the country of the Ustnaras ; as {itythuil .
This debars the rule (If. 4. 25.) by which a compound gets the gender
of its subsequent term. (For accent see Iv. 2. 124.)
2L A Tat-pnrusha compound ending with
the words c upajii&* (invention) and c upakrama* (com-
mencement) is neuter in gender, when it is intended to
express the starting point of a work which is first in-
vented or commenced*
As, qr %T^nrrrof^rnraf «qramgq[ 'the grammars Kalip* &c, had
their commencement with PAnini's invention '; wrngnflf J«WT * Vyidi-inven-
ed Dushkarana '; *il*ltaiMi m^tt%: ' the palace is an invention of rich folks. 9
* l «^U*»H ffgr HTTTft 'the measures are the invention of king Nanda/
Of course, when it has not this sense, the neuter gender is not em-
ployed ; as ?*?*ffr<fr W 4 the chariot made by Devadatta/ H ^^Hmfcift * Of:
'the chariot commenced by Yajftadatta. 9 So also the sense may be that of
invention &c, but when these words are not employed, the neuter gender is
not used ; as TT^ftf^C^f^ ' the slokas invented by Vilmtki. 9 N. P. Prof. Itoh-
thKngk gives ^c fiCTT SK^ireHtf "IHlvCPJ ' The Grammar omitting the time of
day is the work invented by P4nini, (VI. 2. 14.)
«$vt ) ■
22. ATat-p irusha compound eiding with the
word chh&y& 'shadow' is neuter in gender when the
sense is that of profuse ness of the thing indicated by the
first term.
Thus, JJ<*H«dliqJf ' A crowd of locusts darkening the sky/ t«ffi«n ' the
sugarcane shade i. #., groves of sugarcane.' Otherwise, q^fM<ttHU * the sha*
dow of a wall.' (VI. a. 14, accent>
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
318 Samasas. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. § *3-«S-
The sfltra 25 gives optional neuter; this rule enjoins invariable neater
when chhiyA has the sense of profuseness.
¥** ( 1*3***5** ) ■
23. A Ta tpurusha compou nd ending with the
word sabha 'court' is neuter, provided that it is preceded
by (a word synonymous with) the word R£j&, or by a
word denoting a non-human being.
As STOH^ • the King's Court/ ^TOH\' Lord's Court/
But in <i«tt!ir ' the King's Court,' the word is not neuter ; for
synonyms of KTm are only to be taken and not the word-form CTUT; an
apparent exception to Rule I. 1. 68.
So also.ogf :W*x ' the Court of- the Rakshasas/ ft^TTOg^ # the Court
of the PisAchas/ -
But in <hia*HI , ?^TOT &c. f the word is not neuter ; for the word
non-human has a technical significance meaning R&kshasa or a monster.
SIOTST * II ^8 II XJ\lfe II WOTOT, f,.( *xg&
24. A Tat-purusha compound ending with
the word sabh&, when it does not mean a house, but
means concourse, is neuter.
As, €ftaHt » {Kftil^ ' the concourse of ladies and slaves ;' otherwise
vpfltrarar * the poor-house/
*fii: 1 d^r *jcr fatror sn**r Rncir t^w^dw^jj*^ ij^^ife^fv *wi3l fa^ro? 11
25. A Tat-purusha compound ending with
the words send 'army' sur& 'wine,' chh&ya 'shadow 1 , 6&1&
'house' and ni&i 'night/ is optionally neuter, with the
exception of that which is formed by the particle nafi
(II. 2. 6) and the karrnadh&raya compound*
Digitized by GOOQ IC
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 25-28. ] Samasas. 319
As ffnjrcjdHT , fTTOTrfrpt f the Br&hraana army/ vryn. TOfcr * the
barley wine/ ^TCsTO 1 ^ «k«*ol<U ' the shadow of the wall/ ifirjjre 1 ^ 4)31*7
• the cow house/ **fsn[Pl , **f%OT ' tomorrow night 9 But a?d?r ' non-army/
VoNhlT good army/ the former being negative and the latter karmadhiraya
compound. For accent see VI. 2. 14, 123.
^f%: II TCW Sff^f nj^f^ S*X**T d«J*H« ^T II
*rrF3«ti^ 11 fe^iuwuiu^iiittwuty JifaWlr ^w^ 11
26. The gender of Dvandva or Tat-purusha
compound is like that of the last word in it.
This applies to Itaretara Dvandva or coupling by mutual conjunction
S^jirsniTfifa f those two (fern ) the cock and the peahen ' Ji4l)4»'4£lftift f those
two (mas.) the peahen and the cock/ The Sam&h&ra Dvandva is always
neuter. So also in Tat-purusha compound not especially mentioned in the
previous aphorism: As H^ftar^ir: , H^Ruj<ft * half a pippali ; H$*&n}mti&.
Varii — Prohibition must be made in regard to (1) Dvigu compound,
(2) compounds with mi , afTTO and, n# f and (3) compounds with Gati words ;
as, q'-qchMM : f PurodAsa prepared in five cups'; mnftft*: ( SPT + *ftf<n»r) * has
obtained living.' HTT*nfti^, •refrftfa*?: ; fiwftgrfM: f gone beyond Kausambi.
( %* ) "
27. The gender of the compound of the word
aSva c horse' and vadava* a mare,' is like that of the
first word in it.
This applies where the compound is not an aggregate by rule II. 4.
1 2 ; in that case it will be neuter. H^rrjTftpft ; IWJiM , si^TO^ &c., (in
'every number and case) ' those two (mas.) the horse and the mare.' This is
an exception to the last and general rule, by which the gender of the
subsequent term, guides the gender of the whole compound.
firftrct , «rft-n* , w , vitfe , ( yx*\, fefw ) ■
^Rg ii t«F93rfijri Hfirn* tnftpft wii% f**& ^Nfiif' **3* *'
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
320 Samasas. f Bk. II. Ch. IV. & 26-30.
I _.
1
28. Of the compounds 'hemanta&teirau' and
! 'ahoratre' the gender is like that of the first word ; in the
Chhandas. (vedas).
?T*tffrftrt!Wtf 41 "ii Pi , *l$ltl^ f4 Iff: W
This aphorism debars the general rule given in II. 4. 26.
This applies to these words in all cases and numbers, not being con*
fined to them In the dual number, though exhibited in the sfitra in the dual
number, as: — l5<J%MfV*i4. , anTTfTT: jft^J f MftrrwsftCTfT: ' The white fortnight
; is fuel-wood, the black fortnight is the dung-cake, and days and nights are
I bricks (of the altar of sacrifice).*
Why do we say 'in the Vedas 7 Observe j :?t t n-dftlfjj? , HJKwft«ft
3*sft . In the Vedas the ordinary rules of gender are often set aside; this is
i an individual example of the universally exceptional nature of the Vedic
language.
^Cl^T^n^T: tlf% II ^< II T^lfe H ^-3flE^I-3*5U f riik II
j^r 11 *nr *tj *** **3* jfa hi**** 11
29. The Dvandva and Tatpnrasha comi>ound
ending with r&tra and ahna and aha are spoken of in
the masculine.
» • . -
; These words refer to kpt and Samis&nta affixes. Thus the word KJH
is formed by cr3r + *F^ (V. 4. 87) afj- is formed by V. 4. 88 and ar? by V. 4.
91. The general rule II. 4. 26 also does not apply here.
fttT*: , f*r<TC ' A space of two or three nights ' ^i^f: , W^ry: , TOnf:
* the forenoon, the afternoon and noon', sjj : * two days * nnj:, ' three days.'
■ Varti — The words M^rtHli &c, are masculine, as ti^T^T: , Jl^qW: ,
WHI ^tW^F* M \0 II TOfa II 3?q^f , TOTO*! II
w 4 fir. 11 *tot *r**r fifr^f^ft Hf Si 11
30. The Tatpurusha word apatham ' a bad
road' is neuter,
MT*tf*r^ # this (neuter) is a bad road ' UTOift «mpfr *£: f the fool roams-
1 on wronj roads. 9 But *mt$JJ: a (masc.) ' a roadless country/ Here the
compound being Bahuvrihi the word is masculine so; also HTOf •nrtt II
Digitized by
Google
BK. II. CH. IV. § 31. ] SAMASAS. 32t
31. The words 'ardharcha' &c, are spokeu of in
masculine and neuter.
As W$: and mM^ ' half a verse \ ift»nr: and iftro* 'cow-dung.'
These twofold genders sometime, convey different meanings, the masculine
form having one meaning and the neuter, another. . Thus w* ' treasure,* <nn
or «nn^ f lotus ', tfiff: ' treasure/ and jfupj or jfec: ' conch-shell/ *nr: or ipif
'ghost.' But when it is a verbal noun, it takes the gender of the word it quali-
fies. 4fcw or 4fc? A TO«[ 'salt 9 ; but when it is considered as a derivative word
meaning 'born in or belonging to the sea' it takes the gender of the word
it qualifies. OTC: 'best 9 frnf 'compendium. 9 So trf: and >^t\.
1. mW. 2. ifrrc. 3- wronr. 4- «fMfrmj. 5. «nnc. 6. *5*<r.
7. (yir). 8. *reir. 9- w^f- *°- «pr. 11. v*r 12. wr. 13. «***?.
14. w. 15. i|f. 16. *nc*r. 17. qfcr 18. fam. *9- *£*. 20. n*c-
wc. 21. $ij*. 2j. *i«njT?j. 23. ijn^. 24. *jjt. 25. tfta. ~ 26. ijji.
27. ^**r. 28. ir$. 29. m?\ .30 qfeqr. 31. jpctct* 32. wr. 33. *Rf.
34- •tot- 35- *w»- 36. 7*0. 87. ir.Vr. 38. ft* 39. nw. 40. w.
40. fironr. 41- wc. 42. vnr 43- *pi- 44- «*w. 45- *ftw 4*- *n**
47- ^w- 48* far. 49- *&#* 5°* <nPnc. 5 1 - ^rwr. 5*- wncror.
S3- torr*ncur) 5*- far. 55- *tf***- 5*- V*. 57-tfn* 58. *Jtw. 59-
*pr. 60. (*[*?)• 66. tfty 52. utw. 63. *^. 64. ftp*-) 65. ««. 66.
jjlvr. 67. jQir. 68. gvrf. 69. *4. 7o. ^JK 71. %nx. 72. *ftr.
73. *tf 74- wfuj. 75. KTTTf. 76. n^m. 77. Pre*. 78. Prefer.
79. ijwr. 80. ^*r. 81. jew, 82. jpf. 83. fT^PI. 84. jj^r. 83. Phi*
86. (<st?). 87. ijsrar 88. irj. 89. ipr. 90. wjf. 91. jjtt*.
92. *m. 93. t*. 94. f%irpr. 95- T»- 9 s - «*&*• 97» *g*- 9 9 »
*T 99- *** • 100. qstrnR . ioi. i«rfr) . 102. fiu^ir . 103. *iFqr.
104. (qvrai. 105. n&r* . 106. (<*uhui«). 107. *ww. 108. ^5^w.
109. ar*. no. *j*. in. «pn9f. 112. fanctar. 113. (^2*)* 114.
•iff- If 5- hjtt. 116. Rif*r. 117. hto*. 118. *jto. 119. i*m.
120. (t«*rar). 121. ^51*. 122. w^Rf. 123. nn*r. 124. (*f*pt).
125. fq?^ # 126. f%qr. 127. farjF . 128. fa<mH? # 129. in*. 13a
*1W- »3'. •raw. 132. fl*. 133. Hif. 134. faff*. 135. fPTT.
136. wr^. 137. trfar. 138. Trcrar. 139- Ut*. «4<* «rcfa- »4««
(farm;) 142. *Rrcr 143- (^ww.) 144- W. "45. f* 14& ftw.
M7- (nir). '48. (w). 149- (**)• 150. vum. i5«- »**• x 5 a - vi-
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
\ » I
111
32S Samasas. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 31, 3*
• • - ■ "■ - ^
I 53- V* . «54"-: (^5-) >55- ,m ^ nr - , 5 6 * ?in I^ • *57> **** • ^^
«rac. 159. ^W. 160. *ft>r. 161. qntf . 162. acrtfc 163. <ire?.
164. (Bp5i . 165. jc. 166. 5a. 167. n«?r. 168. *\**r. 169. ft**.
170. *£lt*. 17c if^Rf. 172. («5^?). 173- *?**• *74- «f^5f-
I7> *^ U <<M* '76- fltTC* ^77» tfkUJ • 178. H44«K. 179. I^ff. 180.
5^f. 181. H*t . 182. (TTCf). 183. EH*. 184. *f4N?. 185. **.
186. *^r. 187. ^. 188. If. 189. supt. 190. v*ftn> 191. *3f.
192. ^r. 193- (^fr)- »94- (w)- 195- wr. 196- Pr*^ 197*
*r»r • 198- ^- *99- fi*- 3 °°- tf^r- 201. (iftapr)- 202. (*&«*).
203. *m*k . 204. ( qpw ) . 205. nf*p* . 206. < <r*35? )- 207. (*t«k**).
208. *rn . 209. (9psr). 210. ftjnr. 211. nti**. 212. (fawr).
313. «rrr. 214. w*. 215. %m. 216. $*• 217. arrcr. 218.
$ttTO- 219. *rf. 220. fffrf. 221. ^ir. 222. (ifrnr/). 223. iron*.
224. iSif. 225. ?T3i. 226. xrw. 227. iftrer. 228. w*. 229.
^^. 230. irnr. 231. *^s . 232. *g*. 233. «°to. 234. qf.
335. frfw. 236. »}^r. 237. sFTF^r . 238. shr*. 239. wnjj. 240.
*frf • 241. ^pcH . 242. tnr^<?n
32. In the room of idam 'this,' in case of its
re-employment in a subsequent member of the same
sentence and referring to the same thing (anv&de&a) there
is the substitution of a£ which is anud&tta i. e., gravely
. accented, when the third case-aifix and the rest follow.
The word M^rr^J means literally saying (4desa> 'after' (anu) or
after-say or re-employment.
&TO£ (actually a?) replaces %$* In a 'l cases except the nominative
and the accusative, when anvidesa or repetition is implied. *ft( replaces
the whole of ff* by 55 and not only the final i£ Anv4de£a means repeating
in a second sentence with reference to the preceding in which it has already
been used. Both pronouns, the antecedent and the subsequent, must refer
to the same object. As, Hratr^ Qraramt UpTOfhrr , wit W-qi^WnJhfJ
'These students studied in the night and they have read in the day also/
The substitute H^ will replace {?<(, even when the latter takes the affix
. M^ (V. 3. 71.)
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 32-34. ) Samasas. 318^
H^ BlTOf *tiHrf $ftr, ^ft ^[ g r rarfft *Jf 'Give this student a blanket
and give him also a cloth', wir BPTOT tfW* tfh* 1 ** wft WJ spjf W^, 'thi*'
student's conduct is excellent, and his wealth is gr*at.'
Sc also when the affix •PR^(V. 3. 71) comes after the Pronominal
as f*rarn*tf unnwtf *rfar*ft*rr , wft antjungiuitftaii .
The mere mentioning in a subsequent sentence is not anvadc£a: it ti-
the employment again of what has been employed to direct one operation,
to direct another operation. Therefore the rule does not apply here: 9*fff
iftsW 1 V*f *W4M*( 'feed Devadatta and this YajfiadattaV
TTOTTJ^nu *m.* 11
33. la the room ot ^ in case of its re-em-
ployment there is the substitution of the gravely accent-
ed Ms* when the affixes * (V\ 3. 10) and ** (V. 3. 7) follow,'
and the affixes * and n^ are anud&tta also (gravely ac-
cented.)
Thus wr 'here/ and a*H^« hence ' in the following:— <£*tfeF( oft «9
WPT:; wft H 5 ^Kf *pft*t I 'We live in this (etasmin) village, happily/
therefore let us read with full devotion in this (at'ra)/ 3*TC«7rcsPrre5^t*ftcT,
wft wjftr «H«MUJH<.€Hfh* I ' Learn from this student Prosody and also learn-
from him Grammar/ By rule V. 3. 5. »nj is declared to be the substitute of
S^; its repetition here is to indicate that this *nj of anvade^a is anudatta.
M^m: 11
mRfci^ii s«Tf*fir jh^^^^ reran^n
34. When an affix of the 2nd case or CT (Ins/
Sing.) or ^ ( Loc. dual) follows, <r* which is anudatta
is the substitute of ^ and ^ in the case of its re-em-
ployment.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
324 Ardhadhatuka SUBSTITUTES. [ Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 34, 35.
The word ff^is also understood in this sfltra though it was not so in
the last This skipping is technically called ' frog-leap/ Thus: — fif or mi EPt
tpftjKOTHr , iftfr 55 wiMitwuiuiHH ' teach this pupil Prosody, and teach him
Grammar also.' a*5* or ^5«r GTt*r nfaofftir 'H*ft %illg<m * fNlH 'this pupil
studied in the night and he studied in the day also. 1 SFPft: or ^nfr SpTft:
*&** tffa*^ , *&H Vgrtt: «ngf <* * the family of these two students is respectable
and their wealth is great/
Vart: — The word ^nr N neuter and singular, is also used in anvAdeia:.
as> >PT *IMHH3 *W**&Hl ' bring this bowl and wash it* The above three
Sfttras regulate the accent only of certain pronouns.
w f q r ig§ 11 ^ m ^r?pf5f 11 snf -^m% h
35. The clause 'when the affix is Ardha-
dMtuka ■ is understood in, the following aphorisms up
to aphorism 58 of this chapter. ■ -
Thus it will be taught in sfltra 42, « that ^ is the substitute of f^
when f*n£ follows.' The words c when the affix is ArdhadhAtuka • mustbe ?
read into the sfltra to complete the sense. The result will be that in the
ArdhadhAtuka fSn^ namely the arctftfS^ or the Benedictive mood, fs^ is re-
placed by qp^, but not so in the SArvadbAtuka fi?W£ 1. *., the Potential mood
( ftfeRfn^ ). Thus, Benedictive *un^ 'may he kill' ; but Potential fpm^ let
him kill/
The word MnlwtJ^ is in the 7th case ; the force of this case-affix
here is not that given in I. .1.66. i.*., the sfltra does not mean ' when an
ArdhadhAtuka affix follows/ But the 7th case has the force of indicating
the subject, the meaning of the sfltra being ' when the subject is an ArdhadhA-.
tuka affix.* The result of this explanation is, that the various substitutions
enjoined hereafter should be made first, and then the respective affixes
should be applied. Thus whenever we want to affix any ArdhadhAtuka-affix
tow* 'to be/ we must first substitute ^ for it, and then take the proper
ArdhadhAtuka-affix which would come with regard to * . Thus we can apply
*3 to ^by rule III 1..97 which says: 'after verbs ending in vowels tro is
applied.' But this affix could never have been applied to *W which ends in a
consonant Thus we have H^. So the substitution does not depend upon
any particular affix, but ArdhadhAtuka-affixes as a class.
Digitized by LiOOQ IC
BlL II. CH. IV. $ 36. 37O ARDHADHATUkA-SUBSTITUTES. 8£S
jftl: II **fr ipMf tfjft Hfft **fir TOP *TOTW * fcft'Wi II
36. The word srfHf is the substitute of «rj[ c to
eat,' when the affix **n (VIL1.37) or an ftrdhadh&tuka far^
affix beginning with x follows.
TO** « Having eaten/ ( q + H\ + w^ = n + spw + n). So also
unr 'eaten • ( H\ + W = iP^ + « ).
The f in srfnj is merely for the sake of articulation and is not an
anubandha, otherwise there would hare been the insertion of the nasal n
( TO * ^° a * so * e V m WPf &c-i is merely for the sake of articulation* But
•^ + tff ss HW: # food • is an irregularity.
The* employment of v^ in this sutra indicates the existence of this
Paribh&shi. • A bahiraflga substitution of wip[ supersedes even antarafiga
rules. 9 Because in case this maxim did not exist, the substitution of n*^ fpr
«H before vq\ which is taught in this sfitra, would follow already from the
word fttft (before that which is distinguished by an indicatory *0 in this rule,
«. €., sr** would (by maxim ' that which is bahiraAga is regarded as not hav-
ing taken effect, or as not existing, when that which is antarauga has taken
effect ') first be substituted for M\ before ** and wif\ afterwards for **.
Why do we say c before affixes beginning with a ? Observe mril ' is
eaten/
Why do we say 'before affixes having indicatory *f? Observe
. vngw ) ■
37. When luA (aorist) or 6an (desiderative)
follows troj is the substitute of m c to eat.*
WTHH, •mnmj, urot'he ate.' TheSf in nm ts servile and indicates
the substitution of i^r for ft*? of the Aorist (III. i. 55,) So also in desidera-
tive, as, ftrorffir, fw^TO: frtmter 'wishes to eat/
Far/:— The verb s^ is replaced by w^ when the affix m follows
Thus * + HT -m^ sq^+infB mre: ' voracious/
Digitized by VjOOQ
316 Ardhadhatuka-substitutes, [Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 38-40.
tisnfte y \* • vyfk 11 TO-snft: f ^, (o^[s f w$ $ ww) ■
^fts 11 *P? *ifa ^r TOftiifr qrej Bflt^jfr *Rf% II
38. And when the affix ir^ and **j follow
*rer is the substitute of *%.
«rra: 'food, grass/ HJ + «r*J =^RT + M (HI. 3- 19). RTO: 'voracity.'
* + *H+ •*{= * + to.
*wj, wo ) n
^f%: 11 s?tf% fart *^Fra$t toj wlsot wflni
39. In the chhandas (Vedas), *reof is diverse*
ly substituted for m^.
*rcTO£r*J I mfc&ft I (Yajur Veda Vaj. S. XVIII. 9). Sometimes it does
not take place ; as trnrpni qiarilt %1 *$$*\ •
The word ^M is used in this sfitra and the word H^nTTRIFJ in the
next. There is evidently difference between the senses of these words; other-
wise Pinini would not have employed them in such juxtaposition, had they
been synonymous. For then the anuvritti of Wrt in the next sfttra would
have been sufficient. The following verse indicates that difference.
1 Sometimes they are, where there is no express rule for their ap-
plication ; sometimes they are not applied, in spite of an express rule for
their application ; sometimes they are optionally employed or not, and some-
times there is some other result, licence permitted by the rule/ Thus in '
«TC5P£ there is not elision of the penultimate.
fsWRKWW II 80 II TRpfn 11 fsfe $ wq<H< « m ,
( 3?^:, *!*», «IK ) H
«[Rfr: II f&rf? TC3t<lftJ* ! t|tU4rl|l MWH^JI *Wl% II _ .
40. TVhen fa^ (Perfect) follows *tot is optional-
ly the substitute of «^.
*njW or Wf 'he ate/ *RT?J: or mrh: 'they two ate/ TOT: or w$:' they all
ate/ The word 1T^: is thus formed:— ij^ + HJ^ = TO + «n^ + W^VI.
\W
Digitized by
Google
Bk. II. Ch. IV. $ 40-4 j.) Ardhadhatuka-substitutes. 827
t. 8) s * + q^ + ai^f (VII. 4- 60) » * + *^ + •*$: (VII. 4. 62) = W +
^ + **!R (VIH. 4- 53) = * + H$ + 1| !W ( VL 4- 98-)=*^ (VIII. 3. 60).
wj: ) n
*fa: II t*ft ^ftil^Tl *t*fil HWRITClt ftrfft *TC II
41. When ffc^ follows, *fii is optionally the
substitute of S^'to weave.* .
In the Perfect tense thus we have two roots: Let as first take ^n .
Then we have regularly * + fo» = * + m*j =» w*V. The roots in »; , $ and
•it are treated like roots ending in nr thus:—
Sing. Dual. Plural. %
2. *firar or fro , w**j: w*
3- *& <ng: 15:
In this case sampras&rana or*
gained by VI. i. 17 does not take
place by VI. 1. 40.
When however we take the base ^, the f being for the sake of
articulation only, we have the following forms: — n^ + Oj^= 3 ^Rr+^ + «f (VI.
1. 8)=T^ + **(+•? (VI. 1. 17)=??!* ; the *r is not changed into f by VI. 1.
38. " In this dual we have *^ + WJ^ = ^ + •!$: (VI. 1. 15) = 9 + ¥*
+ *Y4: (VII. 4. 60) - *mg: The affix wj^ being Rf*j affix by rule I, 2. 5 there
is sampraslrana before reduplication. Thus we have 3TOT f VH^: » ^p •
Further by mle VI. 1. 39 before Rctj affixes 7 may be optionally substituted
for w , f . *., STSPJ: or vif : and *i£ or *fj: I
^3* ) *
^fin i f f^NHtfa f mwhWV **fir ftifir tot W3far$*{ 11
42. f^is the substitute otrj 'to. kill/ when
the drdhadh&tuka fa* (Benedictive) follows.
quint ' may he kill/ qiTO*P| ' may they two kill/ *W*|: # may they all
kill/
The substitute *w ends with short •? , this •? is elided. This elision
being like the original (sthlnivat I. 1. 56), in forming the Aorist ip£ f we have
»HP^ + % v \\ rz aro>ft*( . Here zero being sth&nivat prevents the vpddhi of
M of * which otherwise would have taken place by VII. 2. 7.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
328 Ardhadhatuka-substitutions. [Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 43-45.
43. And when g^ (Aorist) follows, *n is the
substitute off^.
Hftfhj 'he killed/ W>ftCT^ 'they all killed. 1 The division of this
aphorism from the last sfitra (yoga-vibhlga) indicates that the next rule
applies to Aorist only and not to Benedictive as well. 1 here is no option
in Benedictive Atmanepada.
^Rf: 11 *jfoj Pft# *rt ft^^T srofr 1 wi#t?$ TOifr vft wr*iwwml w
fwwrJijft *wfini .
44. When Atmanepada affixes follow, ^ is
optionally the substitute of r^ in the w^ (Aorist).
Thus tmrfc? or wf?r ; Hwtw*n^ or w^rmr^; wrfwr or nrf*«. _
The verb f^ becomes Atmanepadi when preceded by w (I. 3. 28).
By sfttra I. 2. 14, the Aorist-affixes in the Atmanepada are ftn^ after f^and
by VI. 4. 37 the «r is elided before ftf^ affixes, then by VIII. 2. 27 the ff
is elided. Thus HTf ^ + flr^ + V - Hlf* .
**ft m ^jfen «H 11 TRrrfSr n t*r: , *rr , 5ft , ( «no ) h
jfti: 11 r*t *rr twumfrjl r vcfir qfr <rro 11
qrftaniii r^fw* ffii *^f*ipj 11
45. iit is the substitute of the root ^ when
^follows.
Wll^' he went.' (II. 4. 77) WTRfft 'they two went* Hip « they all went/
The repetition of the word *jr in this sfitra though its anuvptti was coming
from the last aphorisms, indicates that there is no option allowed even in the
Atmanepada, iff being the invariable substitute in all the Padas. Thus «mrAr
«mr 'you went.' The form wr^ is thus evolved H+iTT+fa^+^« WTT*
(U.4-77).
V
Vart: — qr is the substitute of f*j 't > remember 9 in the Aorist, as it is of
f^. Thus WPJT^ 4 he remembered/ HuqmntPg. WPp. The root |^ belongs to
Adidi class.
Digitized by
/Google
Bk. IL Ch. IV. ft 40-49-] Ardhadhatuka-substitutions. 8»
*f*tii«tlw» not^fMnrfw nftuUJt'wftM
46. When the affix f^r (Causal) follows, «iftr
is the substitute of ^ wheu the seuse is not that of
♦informing' hut that of 'going.'
(pprf* 'make* him go* m**, ****** &c But TOWlft 'causes
to believe/ trf»i mf». The <• of lift is for articulation. So also f^to
'remember'; as, nfa»W*fwil
nfo: ) •
47. And when ^ (DesiderativeJ follows, «iftr
is the substitute of q when the sense is not that of
♦informing.'
ftprfrrft « wishes to go » fiPlftTO. fJmtWN. But iwJ^u OftMWl ' he
wishes to inform the meaning.' So also with f« , as »iW*lf*rf«r The yoga-
vibhiga indicates that the anuvritti of 9* only runs in the next sutra and not
of fa The form is thus evolved in the Parasmaipada ; n\+ «^= *\+ «I^ +
« (VI.'i. 9)=«T + n + « (VII. 4.«o)-* + *t + W (VH. 4- 62) - w + «I*
+ n t « ( vn - 3 - s°J = ftnff * r ' and tbcn we add *' personal term,nat,OM -
*firc ii i*v «fir srcfll nfln^fl >wfii m
48. And of i^' to study,' nfa is the substitute
when &L follows.
«*ftf*lfeft ,•€*,•«**' be wishes to study.' The root f^ is alway.
preceded by Ihe preposition mP» . Th's will be Atmanepadi by I. 3 - «
and I. i. 56. The form is similarly evolved by the application of rule*
VII. a. 5» t a nd VI. 4- ««•
jfto 11 mvrtrir wftflr firf* "«w h
Digitized by
Google
330 ARDHADHATUKA SuBStlftff ION. [BK. II. CH. IV. $4$, $t.
49. unj is the substitute of »^ wheu fe^ (Perfect)
follows.
The substitute being like its original (I. i. 68.) ?rrr would have been
Atmanepadi, even without the indicatory, * . Why has then this ^ been
added to it ? The object is that in the sfitra I. 2. I. 9JT7 there should mean
this substitute un£ and not the verb m^ ' to go/
Thus we get Hftpn? f he studied*, nfinmrt , •ffasrtflr?. See VI. 4. 64
and III. 4. 8.
I 50. unr is optionally the substitute of j^
when q*F (Aorist) and sn^ (Conditional Future) follow.
Let us take the case when *w% replaces fy . The affixes of tpr and 5F^
are treated as fircr by 1. 2. 1. and then by the Rule VI. 4. 66 (When -an
&rdhadh&tuka affix, beginning with a consonant and distinguished by an
indicatory ^ory follows ; then let f be the substitute of long a?r of the verbs
J termed % and of iff, WT, *!T, qr, *r, tff), we get wrote (uftr+H + *fr +
W ) , H upforniP^ f WVffa* . In the alternative we have w^y , wtann^
* and tR^ro •
J So also in 31^ ; as mapftcOT , wnfWhTPl , m apftareTj or in the alter- .
native, MUfcnr , UwMap^and wtal^r .
■ *ft * wft , 11 <w 11 n^xfk 11 J$t t % **- wt , ( x**>
m? f fk*m ) ■
51. ht^ is optionally the substitute of f^
in the causative fcr, when that causative takes the affix
san (desiderative) and chad. (Aorisfc). ,
*?PrfiPircfireftr or wrrRrftreRl 'he desires to teach.' The form is thus 5
evolved: in; + Pr^=*n;ft (VII. 3. 36); then by the rules already stated, we
get the above form with the affix ^. Mupft<Ftt{ or ajwfrr^ 'he taught* Thrf
i is changed into HT by VI. 1. 48. Thus f + f*r^ = W + Phj =s W + \
I + f= 9711% . This rule applies to the desideratives of'causatives and aorist
of causatives.
Digitized by
€66gte
fcic It. Cri. IV. $ 53-54.] Ardhadhatuka substitution- 881
52. ^ is the substitute oi the verb w^ c to be, V when
au Ardhadhatuka affix is to be applied.
nftm *he will be/ wfayj 'in order to be/ lRq*q^ ' must be/ Now
the Perfect tense ^affixes are also irdhadhAtuka affixes (III. 4. 115). The Per-
fect of if^is therefore the same as that of w, namely 9 w^JT &c. There is, how-
ever, an important exception to this rule, namely, when W£ is employed as an
auxiliary verb in forming Periphrastic Perfect of other verbs. In that case
WT forms its Perfect tense regularly, *tm , ifffRf: , WJ: &o This apparent
breach of the present sutra is explained by taking the term y^in III. 1. 40.
as a Praty&h&ra including fr , w and H^J , and if a^ could not form its Per-
fect in the regular way, its inclusion in this Praty&h4ra would be useless;
hence we conclude, that as an auxiliary verb, *i^ forms its Perfect regularly.
H%f *fa: n\\n tl^lfa i g*: t *fa:, («no) M
^fii: 11 yfr ^rPmhJlr *wfii wimyS firo* 11
53. *fa is the substitute of ^ i to speak ' when any
4rdhadh&tuka affix is to be applied.
f^CT 'he will speak/ w^ 'in order to speak.' The f of *P* is for the
sake of articulation only. The substitute being like the principal, *^ is
Atmanepadi when the fruit of the action accrues to the agent, as *T^ ' he
spoke/ q^qft ' he will speak/
^ftr. 11 ^%r: ^wrqrlsfft wrfir urt^^ii
^iftf ^ 11 *nufffT**pnn^j 1**% 11
*lfiS*Wl II **?# JffilWf <!*!?**: 11
mftNPJ II WRiftV qfil^ft ***** II
*ffiS^ 11 *f st q nm^4>Rft imro^ 11
54. i&r*i is the substitute of <*n^ c to perceive, to
tell, 1 when any &rdhadh&tuka affix is to be applied.
MRmnrr f he will perceive or tell '; WTOPpJ ' in order to tell'; •JlJHiiqi^
' must be told/ The substitute being like the principal, ^fftn; being always
Atmanepadi (I. 3. 12), trang would have also been always Atmanepadi. But
in that case the letter 3j would have no scope ; it therefore follows that :
is not always Atmanepadi, but under conditions mentioned in I. 3. 72.
^Wf»^ffWiy' n ' m m w i 1 — 11 i w ww
Digitized by VjOOQIC
J
&3S Ardhadhatuka substitutions [Bk. II. Of. IV. $ 55, 56.
Varh — This substitute is also' said to begin with 4£ff instead of ** .
Thus unpr , trotgoitft » ■**SB W|,B * •
Varb. — Prohibition must be stated when meaning * exclusion 9 ; as
*^bft: tfn^JT: ' bad men should be excluded.'
Varh — Prohibition must be stated when the affixes »m and H? follow:
as *J^ETT CTfTCrr: ' the RAkshasas are cruel.' This is Vedic Sanskrit ; modern
ipro:. The meaning of the root ***^ here, is 'to injure/ So also ft^Tt: tftfTO ;
here the affix is *?f •
Varti — Substitutes are made diversely in denoting appellatives and
not qualities and in the Vedic Sanskrit; as H*T»J 'food' (here the substitute srfnj
does not replace iff); T^n^ f killer' (*>¥ being substituted for t\ before <!J^);
ijrt ' body ' ( m is substituted for for before the unadi affix z* % ); firWSJ: (here
n^l is not replaced by ?s*rT before w); *fftrci 'a court yard' (here %nr is not re-
placed by c$ as the next sfitra 56 requires).
^ftl: II fofe <fnroffTV: miMlfrtft <TTH*f%ll
55. **n^ is optionally the substitute of ^f^when
&l (Perfect) follows.
Thef|ff N also is an irdhadhatuka affix and by the last sfitra n&f would
always have been the substitute of ^n^; the present sfitra makes this subs*
titution optional, as HTTOqt 9 WTO*^: and W(5J • In the alternative we
have MHrafr , < ffy^f8 and MPrefa? ;.' he told &c'
• <H3u3 * W qt: II *\\ 11 ^R[TOf II *(§:, ^> f 3TC3£3?<ft: (an©) H
*rffopl II Wft: *filW ^n ST*OT5|^ II
^nf^ir^H ^fn^r^i^^iH* Rr**^i f**id 11
56. <* is the substitute of the verb wr c to drive,*
* to lead,' when an Ardhadhatuka affix follows, with
the exceptiou of the affixes ^ (III. U. 18.) and h%
(III. 3. 69).
*HI44%: ' driver/ irrnKN": .
Why do we say ' with the exception of *ni and «^ f ? Observe ^
+ HIT + T5( = *HT*: 'society'; 7917: 'driving out': So also with M^, as *5R3T:
' a multitude or herd of animals &c.' ^fsd 'driving out of cattle/ See HI. 3. 69.
Why have we used 4t with a long J ? For the sake of forms like
niifir. &c.
) 1 git I zed By
Google -
Bk. Ii. Ch. IV. § 57, 58.] Elision of Vuvan affix. #*
Varb— Prohibition must also be stated (along with *PJ andt|%)of
the affix **nj , as OTHir ' a meeting, fame/
j^ r /:_The substitution is optional before irdhadMtukas beginning
with a letter of ^ PratyihAra (all consonant except * ) as fftm or qrfevr
*ty^or qrHfnj^ . See VI. a. 144 for accent
57. #is optionally the substitute ofwr when the
affix 3 (III. 3. 15 &c.) follows.
This declares an option in case of the affix *^t the word 5 In the
Sutra referring to this affix ; as, srorr: or ROTft f**: ' driving stick or whip.'
qifrww 11 Mjnwwftvrrer «j*n«i*i*^tmwiH*i 11
58. After a word ending with the Gotra affix **
(IV. 1. 151 and after a Gotra word denoting the des-
cendant of a Kshatriya or a Eishi (seer), and after a word
ending with a Gotra affix having an indicatory ^,the
affix sro^ and ^ employed in forming 5^ (IV. 1. 163) des-
cendants, are elided by the substitution ofm 11
1. Thus by sutra IV. 1 . 151 (the affix q*r comes after ^ &c, in denot-
ing descendent) we get sg* + v^« ^tt^f: (VII. 2. 117) 'a grandson of Kuru^*
This is a Gotra word (IV. 1. 162). Now in forming a word denoting a lower
descendent than grandson, we add a Yuvan affix. Thus S?te*+ TH (IV. 1. 95).
Now this XH >s elided by the present sutra, and we get the form *fcWiq: whicn
thus means both a Gotra and a Yuvan (IV. 1. 163) descendent of Kuru. So
that 3ifo?*: is the name both of the father and the son.
Now it may be objected : * the word ^T**T: belongs to the ftrarft class
and by IV. 1. 154.it will take the affix fir*. Do we, what we may, the
form will be qgtc^rrafr: (VII. 1. 2.)' To this we reply, the word aStac?:. which
we see in that list of fSra^ &c. f is not the word 3?h?9: which we formed by adding
*F» under rule IV. 1. 151; that Tikddi word is formed by 3* under rule IV. J.
172, and is confined to Kshatriya. The q?h^: which we have taken; denotes
a Brahmin Gotra formed by IV. 1. 151.
Lfig ' it ' freTrby
Google
j
1
834 Elision or Yovan affix. [ 8k. II. Ch. IV. $ 58.
■ ■ ■ ' 1 1 1 ■ ini »
a. Now to give an example of a word denoting the descendent of a
Kshatriya. We take IV. i. 114. which tells us that ' the affix H^ may be added
to the words which are the names of Rishis, or of persons belonging to the fami-
ly of Andhaka, or Vrishinis or Kuru/ The Andhaka family is a Kshatriya family,
and \qi»*4fi: is a person of that family. Then XTJTRff+H^ = vn*fcfr<fc: ' a des-
cendent of Svaphalka.' This is a Gotra descendent. In forming Yuvan des-
cendent we have nn^ + f*f • Now this f^ must be elided by the present
sfttra. So that ^TKFy; means both father and the son.
3. Now to give an example of Rishis family. The sutra last mention-
ed IV. 1. 1 14. will also hold here. We take the word *fe?: ; and *fe9 + *i\—
*Tf%8: ; the Yuvan affix f*j will) similarly be elided after this ; and thus the
word *rf%7: means both the father and the son.
4. Then to take the example of Gotra word formed by affixes having
indicatory *j . Thus sfttra IV. 1. 104. declares ' the affix an; comes after, the
words fa^&c., in denoting Gotra descendents.' Thus f%T+«T3r"fa ; Then add
fH to denote Yuvan descent, and we have fa + f3j . By the present rule
this $n is elided and thus we have fa both for the father and the son.
The above examples show the elision of the affix fij . Now "we
shall give example of the elision of the affix «ro^ . Now rule IV. 1. 154 says
j f the affix fasj comes after the words Rr^ &c, in denoting descendent' Thus
IRrtr +.ft*l = ^RRrRr: (VII. 1. 2.) Then to form the Yuvan descendent we
add mn by IV. 1. 83. Thus fohiqpf + b*«j . By the present sutra, this it* is
j elided, and we have ftanrfc both applicable tothe father and the son. Other
examples can be multiplied.
Why do we say 'there is elision only after these words? The
. Yuvan affix will not be elided after other words. Thus rule IV. I. 1 12 says:—
j 'The affix H«J comes after Rj* &c. f in forming Gotra/ vfow* + H«J =* ^Kf*
j Now this is neither a word formed by x& nor is it the name of a Kshatriya
or a Rishi ; nor any affix having sj goes to form it Therefore the Yuvan
j affix pi will not be elided after this. Thus *&** + I ^ (IV. I. 95) ^?fe
I 'son of Kaubada. 9
Why do we say ' affix denoting Yuvan descendent is elided ?• An affix
not denoting p Yuvan descendent will not be elided. Thus the pupils of
*mtwr are called *FTCmT: which word is thus formed: <nTOf + *F* =* *W-
j Hn: f a descendent of Vimaratha' (IV. 1. 115). Then to denote pupils we
i add tru by IV. 2. 1 1 1. Thus *ran* + **°l =*Pm-*r: • a pupil of VAmarathya/
i Why do we say f Yuvan affix ws^ and f3j are elided '? The other
Yuvan affixes under similar circumstances are not elided. Thus the Yuvan
\ *
' id t>y
Google
Bk. II. Cri. IV. § 59, 60.] Elision of Yuvan affix- S3*
desccndent of frfir (grandson of w) will be fmnn: Here the affix «K^ (IV.
1. 101) is not elided.
Varh — All Yuvan affixes are elided after Gotra words not denoting
Brahmin Gotras ; as ^fa: applies equally to father and son; *TT*T%: father,
*H *lfi| : son; •ftf*^: father, •ItjHft: son ; W?tin^r: father, W*hntf*T: son.
Here, first fij is added by IV. 1. 173, then q^ to denote Yuvan desccndent.
Then this 7^ is elided by the present Vartika.
59. And after the words fa &c there is the w^ elision
of the 5w affix.
4\*tt + W = ^i (IV. 1. 118). 'The Gotra descendent of Paila.*
fer: + Rrsy (IV. 1. 156). The present rule intervenes, and the Yuvan affix
ftr^ is elided ; so fa is both a Gotra and a Yuvan word. Some say that, the
'Paila&c words are formed by the affix fir; (IV* I. 95) and then the *uk-
elision of the Yuvan affix would be valid by the next rule 60. They would limit
the scope of the present sutra to cases where the Gotra of the people is not
known, the Prachyas not being indicated.
1. $5? . 2. jjMfjf . 3* ^nnrfar . 4* ww*ifir . 5. rnrfir • 6.
tnrffir. 7. •J^ff^r* 8. *rterfir. 9. wrtfir. 10. tft^qft* . n. 4hprfsir .
12. »?^fer. 13. fcrwrfir. 14. fr y»ireft . 15* rrfwf*. *6- *tfcf^r.
17. nft. 18 «tfefN. 19- •ttsrpnfir- ao. tftrfsrjnr. 21. *far[f^. 22.
GSJi|l«*lW • 23. 4ftlf •
GO. After a word ending with the Gotra affix ^ (IV.
1. 95) there is Ink-elision of , the Tuvan affix, wheii the
Gotra of the people called Prachya (Eastern) is denoted.
qrWTT + r 5 ? = Wrnnft: 'the Gotra descendent of Pann&gara'; after
this the Yuvan affix <frar (IV. I. toi) is elided by the present rule! and so
SNiHiR: is both the father and the son. So HI^Nfa: father and son. The word
HIM|^ here qualifies the word Gotra understood and does not show that it is an
optional rule in the opinion of Eastern Grammarians. When the Gotra of
Prichyas is not denoted, there is no elision. Thus fTfir. and y%muj: ' son of
DAkshi.' "
Digitized by
Google
336
Elision of Yuvan affix. [Bk. II. Ch. IV; § 61, 62
1 §T**f&*|: M V II Vfip&t II w f sftwfwr:, (fft f g^J n
61. After the. words ^h^fe? and the rest there
is not Ink-elision of the Yuvan affix.
ift??i?f: is the name of the father and qWrHPT .' is the son of the
former, formed by the Yuvan affix q^(IV. 1. 101).
1. fSh^ffti. 2. wrcPi. 3-*rcfcj. 4*cnrPi. 5. tettfc . 6. t*fa #
7. jpftfo . 8. k*fa . 9. #fftr . 10. fcrftfc. 1 1. (^rRr . 12. forftr . 13.
WPlf, I4^T^- 15 $$*• 16. #1r. 17. W^fTTf%. 18. ^Tr^Tfft.
19. «f^rwrft* 20. w^rhfEf . 21. an*:*. 22. mftsfir. 23. tof*. 24.
jranrfir . 25. *F*fa? . 26. $#Hn . 27. Brrl%?rr%. 28. wflrftr . 29. hi^R: .
30. toft . 31. wRrwftf . 3*- *to • 33- «W^ffi* . 34- fcrf* . 35,
*tf*- 36. ^ffilll
"*T«ltaM«l&'l$tf wjw *fffii 11
62. There is luk-elision of the *r*nr (IV. I.
174) affix, when the word is used in the plural number,
provided that the plural number is taken by the base it-
self, and not by its standing as a compound epithet depen-
dent upon another word, and provided that the bafce
is not used in the feminine.
W]F = Wf + *T0X(IV. 1. 170) 'a prince of Aflga'; [plural tr^r: 'th*
princes of Aftga.' The affix wi£ * s elided by the present rule, and the
Vriddhih vanishes with it too (I. t.63) ; but BTrsror: ' the princesses of AAga,'
plural of irf«ft f a princess of Aftga/ But ftarfir: 'he to {whom the prince of
Vanga is beloved' forms its plural fimfar: 'they whose beloved is the prince
of VaAga/ there being no elision.
'TCSI&p'ft ^ II ^ II x?^tOi II U^B-Snf^flqr: f ift% (153;
63. After the word *** &c., there is the luk-
elisiouofthe Gotra affix, when the word of itself and
V
1
ii' D i cj i t 'i gegl by '
Google-
*. ^_ w._v..iaa^
( }
4 i
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 63, 64.] Elision of Gotra affix. 837
not as part of a compound epithet dependent on an-
other word, takes the plural ; but not in the feminine.
*re^f -I- *T*l~TC3r: 'a descendent of Yaska not nearer than grandson/
In the plural, the affix is elided and the form is *"Wn ' the descendents of
Yaska/
**CT*W: II
1. irc*i . 2. hw . 3. vu . 4. ito*otqt . 5, inp **r* . 6. g«rett5 .
7. *i*wn • 8. qt*T<5grc . 9. *lrohr . 10. qngfcq? . 1 1. *pifn? • 12. (q*?t
**§ • *3- w*ww. 14- qrcnET^r. 15. Rrt%c . 16. «[%. 17. «ra9flv. 18.
ffirag . i9' reft^r . 20. ti£iiqr . 21. ra*rar« 22. 9*1*1. 23. to*?* 24.
****? • 25. 3**?^ . 26. 3«kt^ . 27. firoj? . 28. OTftno* . 29. i&?*i*rar .
30. ttfrgrnr. 3i-*nrrrf. 32. ift^ff*. 33- #****. 34* jprrr. 35- *** •
36* ***?. 37. Hg^n . 38. tf%* . 39. Hfatf*. 4°* <**• 41. *(****•
TO^T^r 11 V* u xr^if^r 11 ^-3i3t: f % (*jg, i^nign) 11
64. And there is luk-elision of the Gotra affix-
es ^ (IV. I. 105) and wj (IV. I. 104.) when the word of
itself and not as part of a compound epithet dependent
on another, takes the plural but not in the feminine.
ifi} + *Pj =: urn}: ; plural «rof: 'ifte mate idescendsnte of Garga', Sq
also qror: ' the male descendents of Vatsa'; the singular beiqg, 9RC^.: Similar-
ly* ftf + W^ = ** (IV. j. 104); plural ft^T: and not 4*r: ; similarly iftf
singular ; «Jhlf: pluraL
But these affixes are not glided when th e word forms part of a coin*
pound. Thus, fiwn«*i|: ' those to whom Gargya is beloved; 1 ProNf : 'those
to whom Baida is beloved. 9
These affixes will not be elided in the feminine. Thus, irrf: $ fa#
feminine plurals.*
Of course these affixes must be Gotra or patronymic affixes, otherwise
there will be no elision. Thus tffa + inj = &&(: • living on *he island/ plural
Jczrr:; here the affix n^ is not elided as it does not denote a Gotra. So
SW + 3f^ =s Ht99: ' the pupil of Utsa/ plural **Wt: ..
Vart: — Informing Tat-purusha compound of the singular and dual
genitive, the affix n^and ar^ are optionally elided. Thus npfcr ^#»iipnt-
w& or m*fap3? , tnrr^fjr: ^t « tnnH£ff or*rf«tf . . .
"t/ ' msm^bi by Google
338 Elision of Gotra affixes. [Bk. II. Ch. IV. $ 65, 66.
Similarly $f** or If^ft: «pv - $f*r# or faigfi •
Why do we say 'the affixes sp^ or m?{ '? Because other affixes will not
be elided in forming *RJ5*T compound; such as aff^^ffl
Why do we say ' singular or. dual'? Because in the plural *R$tt
compound these affixes must necessarily be elided and not optionally; thus
Why do we say f in forming W35* compound'? Because in forming
other compounds, these affixes will not be elided. Thus, 3TOT*4 which is an
arwrofar* compound, meaning irrfa* ^»fW . Of course, it is only in the Geni-
tive *m* that this rule is applicable ; it will not therefore apply in tfciftlK*
?rj^t &c.# as TC*niHh I
65. And after the words *?3r , yi , *w, *fa*s, ita*
irftrTH, there is luk-elision of the Gotra-affix, when the
word takes the plural, but not in feminine.
Thus the plural of Ml** ( HPr + *ff IV. 1. 122. ) the des-
cended of HPT, is <WT: f the regulat plural of Hfe So also, singular
*pfc. plural *|ir*:; singular qftan, plural 9JWT: ; so, *ftrST:, *fftwn, Mf^JTO: .
In all these the affix has been elided. Thus ^ + *T\ = Hftf *: ' the
descendent of Bhrigu. Of course, it is only in the plural number that the
Gotra affixes *^ and BT* are elided, not in any other number; so we have in
singular W^r: vAt*, dual «n*ft *P?^ ; plural atlTO, fTC &Cm
But when these words are part of a compound, the Gotra affixes are
not elided in forming their plural. Thus ftrarfTO or frranfar: I
In the Feminine plural the affixes are not elided. Thus:— »4i3**:
s^jw f* nratrcftg ii ft n ^w 11 *i**h 1*: «wi-
66. There is luk-elision of the Gotra-affix f^
(IV. I. 95) after a word containing many vowels (a poly-
syllabic word) which denotes the Gotra of the people
called q^and^ when the word takes the plural.
1 ■ 1 1 i iec l I s 1
rCoogle
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 67, 68.] Elision of Gotra affixes. 839
The plural of qwimR:: isqwnrrc:, there being elision of f^; so also *r*
?TOT: plural of ifl«lfcrpr:; so the plural of iftfofefc is^fiifoa: the descendents
of Yudhishthira. But 5ft*: and qfcwp not being polysyllabic, their plural will
be $3TO: and w^* : •
Why do we say ' when denoting the Gotra of PrAchyas and BhArat-
as'? Because when denoting the Gotra of any other people, these affixes will
not be elided. Thus HMI^q: plural of TOn^Rf ffeWW plural of ffifttffln .
Though the Bh A rat as are PrAchyas, its specification here is to indicate
tliat, wherever ' Pr4chyas f will be used, it will not include Bharatas as in
V. 4. 60. Here the Yuvan affix of Bharatas will not be elided. Thus HT%Pf:
father, &ti *frjHM: son.
67. After the words 4i<m , &c, there is not
luk-elision of the Gotra affix, when the word takes
the plural.
This prevents the application of II. 4.64. Thus *fta** + H^*«ftafT»
plural *ftwn: ; singular *hr*:, plural ^fatf: . The iflVW &c. belong to Vid&di
class, vide IV. 1. 104, and are the following: — (fftCTt RjJ, (%*J f H*pr f *HT,
BTWR, J^PPE and XffT'fr. The remaining words such as f J^l &c., should not
betaken in this sub-class. In the case of ffcf &c, the Gotra affix must be
elided in the plural by Rule 64. Thus ( faff: f%^IW. &c.
68. After the words fiw %w &c, when used as
Dvandva compound, there is the luk-elision of the Gotra
affixes, when the compound word takes the plural.
Thus fa^+f^=*&tfmfa:(IV. 1. 154). Its plural is tanrro 1 taro*w: +
4imi*H* : - Rwf^nrr: I There is elision of finj . So also *ferir: plural
^U3**: (IV. 1. 95) + W3<frCOT:-V3rotttalT: ; there is elision of t*t (IV.
1. 95). The following is a list of such compounds.
IV. I. 99, elision of !&$. 4. Ttr^TTW : (THRPf : + «TfC**:. IV. 1. 95, elision
Digitized by
Google
1 346 Elision of Gotra affixes. [Bk. tl. Ch. IV. $ 69.
of %*l )• *<M<gqy r ft uj *i ;, 6. ^irar^rr: ( *?Nsr*: IV. 1. 95. + *i%m IV, 1.
1 1 2, then the elision of f^ and *r\). 7. W|-tfl^5W: (the elision of f^IV.
9. 95 as in 4). 8 TOTCfcKT: (arhremro IV. 1. 154 + **Nrnr: IV. I. 95, elision of
FfcT^and f*| # 9. * j*f srforsrr: (elision of fsjas in 4) 10. fr^l l iHfri^HKl:
(elision of X*l) u. »r3r^r— frt^KT: (Wfiri**: IV. 1. io5 + *T#T^: IV, 1.95,
elision of both *pj and **£).
<HW4*mHW f ^3^t f (^52 §^5*5 ) »
69. After the words *ra &c. there is option-
ally luk-elision of the Gotra affix when the words take
the plural whether they enter into a Dvandva com-
pound, or are used separately.
Of the words belonging to this list, three have already been enumerated
in the group of Tika-kitav&di of the last sutra. The elision is invariable in the
Dvandva compound of these three, but when used separately the elision is
optional. As, 3T3TOTOT:, *g4t<h!<i8H|:, ^u'liftH't^tWUI" But the plurals of
HtTSTnTPr, the Gotra-derivative of OT3f (IV. I. 99) is OT^rr: or sttaKFOTT ; of WPT-
tKHFr: is mm: orOTH^RT:; of selsff is tU2*r: or Mri<*iq:. The plural of qffftsfo:
is *fa*OT: or «CTfir*cra. |The plural of qamjffafr : is $mnfim: or qtTCgffrTO:.
The plural of fre&pre is $*"iy4<J: or ^r^S^i*: .
Of the rest of the words belonging to this group, there is option
allowed, both when they occur in Dvandva compound or when used alone.
They are as follow:—
1. qgmres . 2. m»4h*h . 3. 115* . 4. sprf^t . 5- «fas • 6. wr-
srf. 7. <ai<ta^r . 8. ^wret. 9. TO^ft . iagsScFi. n. «r3tro. 12.
**ngfro. 13. fasnr. 14- **rfJtfN« u s . 15. sprats* 16. ^Wfa^ . 17.
orcitai . 18. <rcS*i • 19- srfssrar . 20. Tfinra* . 21. st^h^t - 22. *i*5frr . 23.
*stfi*|H* . 24. Sift**)? . 25. 1HTFT . 26. SRftfftT . (27. ^3TTO . 28. 3f^ .
29. 9*15* . 30. **to*k . 31. q^^H . 32. a^nr . 33. wnro . 34- *w* .
35- $*5BH . 36. 4i4*44i . 37. pJ44<H . 38. TOJC^toJ . 39. IfF* . 40. ^fPHT .
4 1 - *TO3iqs ) 11
^Vf^irft: , wfei-^tere , (^52 §^ f snft to:) 11
^ftt: 11 wiwi4tifi^K4H <ft *ptv**s *pt*Rf% qftffc*w*v nffimnrc *
D i g ii t i noc U b i y VjOfcJV i itL *
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 70-72.] Elision of Case affixes. 34! .
70. There is luk-elision of tlie Gotra affixes
WH aud ^ of the words ttprcar and qsVfttx^, when they
take the plural ; and the words anrfct and *f**sp^ are the
snbstitntes of the bases so remaining afetr the elision.
The plural of WTC«T is Vraw (as if it was the plural of «m!%f ) and
of ^fir^^n istgrt^prr:. The affix M^ (IV. I. 114.) after HPI**and the affix
**{ (IV. 1. 105) after q?tt*7?* are elided.
The ^ in ^!^pp^ Js indicatory and regulates the accent (VI. 1. 163) ;
the word 3gf*CT has udatta on the middle vowel ; and its substitute will also
have the same accent* There is no elision however in wrafNf^gPlf
(IV. 1. 89)*Wn*sprr: (IV. 2. III).
*** ,( §* ) "
71. There is luk-elision of the case -affix of a
word when it gets the name of a root, or os a crnde
form.
A noun is changed into a root ( W3 ) when it is made a denomina-
tive verb. Asyfta.lf (III. 1. 8; he wishes for a son of his own. A noun
which forms part of a compound becomes a crude-form (I. 2. 46) ; as TCfta:
'having recourse to pain'- tnqjro 'king's man. 9 In all these examples, the
case affixes have been elided. - .
Thus yen T*&C* =» yfr*3l , here the 2nd case-affix is elided. ^rfMW:
= ^reSro &c.
Why do we say ' when it gets the name of ^PJ or JfffiHfcV ?
Because when it gets any other name, such as HJ" &c, the case-affix
is not elided. Thus ^r. t *n?r: I
72. After the verb vt\ € to eat' and the rest,
there is Ink-elision of the Vikara^ia 3^ (III. i. 68)*
Thus H\ + *f% + fir =^rSf 'he eats*; ffai 'he kills; if*' he envies.
The Adadi verbs belong to the second conjugation. In this class of verbs,
therefore # the terminations are added direct to the root.
Digitized by
Google
»**-v*t-i~* v ' .- «_- m~~ *w» i k ft*-. 4.
342 Elision of 'Sap.' [Bk. II. Ch IV. §73.76
*3^ g^ft 11 b^ n ^fct n *gs* f ^fi f fare* g^J 11
vftr: ti qe«f« fire* *nt *|*t g^^rfir 11
73- In the Chhandas (Vedas) there is diversely
the luk-elision of the Vikarai.ia jj\ (III. 1. 68).
There is elision in other conjugations than Ad&di ; and there is some-
times even no elision in Adidi verbs. As yf \&tfh ' he kills Vritra/ tf\ + 3(J%
+ f%=^r^r instead of f y* I So also, 5?^: ^Rr3 instead of $9. {Rig. V. I.
3 2 ' 5)* : In these cases the Vikarana ^F^ has not been elided.
In some cases the ST^is elided as ^TM^'ft fc^T: instead of ^rai*t 11
*i^tjfe * 11 btt 11 ^ft n q^: f s?fa f * f (§* *ysw ) II
*f*|: II 7r#t 5J*TH*fa stf% q«r* <K*:, *MaiUJ q€^H^mHH^^< t *TO 5^ftl
ffell - % "
74. And there is diversely the luk-elision of
**.(IIL 1. 22) when the affix s?<|(IIL 1. 134) follows.
By using ' diversely ' there is elision of tR* when other affixes than
a?^ follow, both in the sacred and profane literature; as*?r<JT 'much cutter'
(sfrfRT + s?^) ; «fJTjT: ' much purifier.' Qifcrcr: from eq ' to drop.' tfttTO: from
***** to fall/ the 5ft being added by (VII. 4. 84).
So also *R£ is elided before other affixes than *T^ thus ^ll^>Pi^0
OTWftftf , JsjfircfMtf* II See also I. 1. 4.
g^cmf^Ri: *§: II Wi II H^lfo II $$f9-«r.f^R|: , *§r f
(3TT:)n
^Rr: 11 sj*turrf***r ^icw *r: nz fafir 11
75. After the verbs */to sacrifice' and others,
there is Sin-elision of the Vikarana xr^(III. 1. 68).
These verbs belong to the Juhoty&di class, affife 'he sacrifices' (VII.
1. 10). J5j causes the reduplication of the root. So also fqftft ' he fears.
Ff ^ fig from fkn ' to purify/ he purifies.
*3» ^^f% II *$ II *V$t « *$&% ^fk , (*jt?: *§:) H
^Rt: if s?*fk Rre* wsr JJ* x$ 4*fii II
76. In the Chhandas there is 51u -elision of
^diversely.
Elision does not take place where ordained, and takes place where
not ordained. frRr fitafa (instead of ^fSl ) 'he gives pleasant objects,' mffi
instead of ffrfft .
^ ■ iwjuyGoQglc
.»;
Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 77, 78] ' f Elision of ' Sich/ 348
So also there is ilu-elision ot the vikaranas after roots other than
those belonging to the Juhotyadi class. Thus; <gjh fiRrfar , *lf%* ft*far •
mfo-w-g-v-^wj: , fav , xroSta^, (§*r) 11
77. There is luk-elision of the affix fe^(III.
1. 44) in the Parasmaipada, alter the verbs iS ' to go,' «qr
'to stand,' the verbs called ^ (1. 1. 20), *r 'to drink* and ^
'to be.'
TO is the substitute of fU^ (II. 4. 45).' fir^ the affix of the Aorist is
elided after these verbs in the Parasmaipada as WTW 'he went, 9 •TBn^'he
stood/ MV^ 'he gave/ WTH/ he held/ wi^ ' he drank/ wg^ *he was. 1
Varti— The verbs ijr and qr in the aphorism mean, the ijf . ' to go'
(which is the substitute of fuj , and not § ' to sing/) which also assumes the
form iff , and srr ' to drink ' and not qr ' to protect.' The verbs ijr • to sing f
and qr ' to protect ' will form their Aorist with (%^ without its elision ; thus
WTTtft^ 'he sang/ *nrtft^ ' he protected/
In the Atmanepada the f%^ is not elided ; thus un w ra f m*tt t*f^r. •
fawrei m^urora ;iis6ii tnpfSr n from , *n-^-*n-
^RniisrS? jcrr^r m r^t^ ct?** fare <itsfc?^ firaror 5^ *ifir 11
78. After the verbs m * to smell,' ^ * to drink.'
vt ' tfr ) c to pare, 1 w ( jft ) c to cut/ and «r ( st ) ' to destroy,'
there is optionally the elision of fa*, when the parasmai-
pada term inations are employed.
Thus wrnj or irorcfcl ' he smelled / •rer^ or Wf^ ' he dranTc / miRj
or %qjrtfl^ 'he pared/ H^sp^ or «i^or^h( ' he cut' and aranj or Wfrthj ' he
destroyed/
There is no option allowed in Atmanepada ; thus, WTTOntf Cpprail
***** 11
The root 5^ is a Ghu verb, and in its case, the fa^ would have been
elided by the last rule also. The present declares an option.
Digitized by
Google
ct^ac-j'.s
I
844 Elision op ' Sica' Bx. II. Ch. IV. § 79, 8*
— y— ^— — — — ^— — — ■— -^— — — — — ^— ii 1 11
79. Alter the verbs n^ c to expand, and others
there is optionally the Ink-elision of Rrj when the
Atmanepada affixes w and tn^ of the second person follow.
Thus tpnr (VI. 4. 37) or ittifro ' he expanded/ *T*W: or HnPim f : • thou
didst expand. 9 Similarly HOT* or iroftc? 'be gave. 9 •TOrtjnor »raP |«gC : ' thou
didst give/
The roots tr^ and ^H must both belong to the Atmanepada, and not
to Parasmaipada. Hence in the Parasmaipada there is no elision of fe\.
Thus, iroft*? *JJP| 'you did expand/
ffaWwii
80. In the Mantra portion of the Vedas there
is Ink-elision of the sign of the Aorist (& Perfect), after
the verbs «r^ c to eat' *c 'to be crooked,' «rp 'to destroy' j 'to
choose,' 'to cover,' j^'to bnrn,' verbs ending in long **, ^
f to avoid,' 7 * to make,' irft 'to go' and *rf% 'to be produced.'
The word Rrf is^the name given by ancient grammarians to the affixes
of Perfect tense as well as the Aorist, or it might be common term for all
tense-affixes. Thus from TO we h jive *PRH in the sentence, *&&{ firarft JJff' ii^f
first* 1 *&€*Fa f**& fa*£: 1pWur^(Yajurveda XIX. 36 so also Rig. L 82. a).
From the verb ^ we have Trgffcrc* **^. From htj we have TOn^
in the following verse *nr: wft BTC**t ^Ri: uur^jfsfar I KW •fftfTOJ^ft M
(Rig. 1. 18. 3.)
The word W in the sutra includes both *J8£ and *pj 9 as the word
%* in the following ffrf snjpf Jtf *f jytfrrft^' «Pf: ^^r' S* «?r*: I fry ^*nt
SjfT ifc* fiOT: S*H ^KfTO^V fir 4: II (Yajurveda 13. 3^
From ^f wc bave WT^J as in wrt&izfkfil 1 *tf*HK$t WTCK^h ST^HC HPf
airas || (Rig. VI. 61. 14). The word w^ means verbs ending in long w as nr
'to fill/ Thus, Rw: Npn5«inrf« *qtf*«* TOO^irfr 1 nnir unr »Pr# wtfw
The root ^n gives us *** as in the following verse:— m Ht MfaCTfnrt
to- *n*rfoj«nir i *hr*i ifcs* *ro 11 (Rig. VIII 75. 12).
"TJisw i zfe ' d ' py
Google
t)
Bk. II. Ch. IV. J 81.83] Elision or Tense affixes. 345
From fr we have *H6*l as in the following verse %T*r*t mn *&_ fEfh 9f
5^4*3*1 M»* «*' W**W* »* OTf** II (Yajurveda III. 47).
From ipr we have «fCT; as in the following verse: ^*h| ** *£i*rfa4t
fWJfwipfhftiiyinji imnf'tfrfv'pftf rn*tf f^fr tfffcrtahi (R>g- VI. Li).
From inr we have HiPf as njpi V ifW f^TT: . This is an example from
the Brahman literature, as the word Hyt in the sutra refers also to the
Brahman literature.
mm n ai n tnpf* a«m:, a (fe* 9 5*) 11
81. There is luk-elision iu the room of that
te use a ffi x ( f%f ) which comes after «n^ of the Perfect.
•fP( is used in forming Periphrastic Perfect jftaft 'he endea-
voured. Here, after the verb ffng all tense-affixes are elided, and the Perfect
of fr is added to form its Perfect Similarly ^fta£ ,'{*rhpfc W
^f*f: II W44IJ4HMI 1 !: *yni g^fffif u
82. There is luk-elision of «mj (the feminine
termination) and 5^ (the case-affixes) after an Avyaya
or Indeclinable.
Thus, inr VMimH ' in that hall'. Here the Indeclinable mr ' there/
does not take the feminine termination, although it is equivalent to frc*P( 'in
that/ So also fRtf ' having done ' ffcftf &c. Hete the case-affix is elided.
Mi*ra^ f «rp , aw , 3 • **^*»i: f (3*: §*) 11
*P»: 11 *T***iu*«i4Niui2'Hifw wit h *$*^ *f*fa, wn5^wj n?f «qt wnr-
<pg**lf : II
83. There is not luk-elision of the case-affix
ateran Avyayi-bh&va compound that ends in nr; nn^ is
the substitute of its case-affixes, but not when it is the
fifth case-affix.
This debars luk-elision which Wzs to have taken place by the last
sfitra ; instead of luk-elision, we have WJ added to the words ending in short
H; for examples of this, see s&tra II. 1.6; as OT*5*>iftl*itf ' upakumbba is
standing'; TT^HT^W 'see the upakumbha.'
Digitized by
Google
.- -_ •(
•I
$46
Substitution op case affixes. [Bk. II. Ch. IV. § 84, 85.
'k
I ! ; ■ '
1 »
I!
[ !
Why do we say 'afterwords ending in short if*? Because after Avyayt-
bhlvl compound ending in any other vowels there is not substitution, but there
is total-elision of the case-affixes ; as avftreft , HRr^ifrft
But the ablative case-affix is not elided after Avyayibhiva com-
pound ending in short *? , nor is there the sr^ substitution; as ^f^HltWC
«w, (*ro «raritai%) 11
84. The change to u^ of the third and seventh
case -affixes coming after an Avyayibh&va compound
that ends in *?> occurs diversely.
7735**? or TT^ TT y*r 'done by upakumbha "j; OT3£*5 PnJffc or
WgPM^RrJif ' put it in the upakumbha. 9
Vart. The ^T substitution is invariable and not optional in the locative
case when the AvyayibhAva compound denotes prosperity^ 1 1, i. 6.) or a com-
pound of rivers (II. I. 20 and 21) or a compound having a numeral for its
member (II. 1. 19); as, *T*nCJ 'well or prosperous with the Madras '; fgqirPl
•well or prosperous with the Magadhas'; similarly g^r^ry^ i sttffOT^fl I
If^XT^W/tCni^ I The word ' diversely* establishes^ these even without the
VArtika.
Wii
H^Pn JttJIihHHl II
85. *r, rf and to are substituted respectively
in the room of the three-affixes of the third person ot
5» ( First-future ), both in the Parasmaipada and the
Atmanepada.
Thus in the Parasmaipada 3*9? 'he will do/ qretfit 'they two will do; 9
9*tfTc: 'they will do/ So also in the Atmanepada we have HufclT, Wtafft,
Why do we say 'in the 3rd person' ? Observe j*: 3i<rf,% I tftHihirc} 11
-:oo:
\
1
' BiaWzec f byOoOgfe '
/
. M l . ! ■ UP W I II H'"
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
,•■•
h
i :
BATES OF SUBSCRIPTION.
Payable in advaiv* for the complete work, including postaoe.
Indian, ■".••■•' . ■—. — • — Rs» ^20 0; 6
Foreign . — — />. . ... . jg : / 2 O
Price per set of 4 parts, f. r., one Book or Adhyfiya; bound in one
volume, including postage— Rs. 3 (Indian), 0*. (Foreign).
I ntending Subscribers^ and Patrons arc. requested*, to apply with
remittances to the following address. , ; y /
V , ^ ; SATYAJNAN CHATERJI,
'» PUBLISHER OF PANINI,
• •/ • V : • - V .*- ■-." ' /Allahabad:--
/ . fi-.-W. Provinces, India:
u
I.
V
,:\ *;
-'.<:.. ;-
\ V
v.i:.
Digitized by VjOOQ IC
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by
Google
BcH:b:nd<ng Co., Inc.
300 Suwmor Street
Digitized by
Google
Harvard^ 2138 ^6in .
V-^V^
-\
Digitized by
Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11